YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
LEVEL 1, 99 QUEENSBRIDGE STREET, SOUTHBANK, VIC 3006, AUSTRALIA
©
2008 All rights reserved.
RX-V563
Printed in China WN25560
RX-V563
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
G
Karcher 1046
Kendo 1044
Kenwood 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1043
KLH 1006
Kodak 1003, 1004
Korpel 1050
Leyco 1050
LG 1003, 1042, 1045,
1071
Lifetec 1044, 1048
Lloyd's 1005
Loewe 1048
Loewe Opta 1045, 1046
Logik 1006, 1050
Luxor 1047
LXI 1003
M Electronic 1042
Magnasonic 1047
Magnavox 1004, 1018, 1033
Magnin 1003, 1014
Manesth 1050
Marantz 1000, 1001, 1004,
1046, 1051
Marta 1003
Matsui 1044, 1045
Matsushita 1004
Mediator 1046
Medion 1044, 1048
MEI 1004
Memorex 1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008,
1013, 1014, 1042,
1045, 1047
Memphis 1050
Metz 1048
MGA 1014
MGN Technology
1002, 1014
Micromaxx 1044, 1048
Microstar 1044, 1048
Migros 1042
Minolta 1010
Mitsubishi 1011, 1042, 1046
Montgomery Ward
1008
Motorola 1004, 1008
MTC 1002, 1014
Multitech 1002, 1005, 1006,
1042, 1046, 1050
Murphy 1042
National 1048
NEC 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1043, 1051
Neckermann 1043, 1046
NEI 1046
Nesco 1050
Nikko 1003
Noblex 1002, 1014
Nokia 1043, 1047
Nordmende 1043
Oceanic 1042, 1043
Okano 1044
Olympus 1004
Optimus 1003, 1008
Orion 1012, 1013, 1044,
1065
Orson 1042
Osaki 1042, 1045, 1050
Otto Versand 1046
Palladium 1043, 1045, 1050
Panasonic 1004, 1020, 1034,
1040, 1048, 1054,
1072
Pathe Marconi 1043
Penney 1010, 1014
Pentax 1010, 1049
Perdio 1042
Philco 1004, 1051
Philips 1004, 1025, 1033,
1046, 1056, 1057,
1059, 1062, 1063
Philips Magnavox
1018
Phonola 1046
Pilot 1003
Pioneer 1011, 1046
Prinz 1042
Profex 1050
Profitronic 1014
Proline 1042
Proscan 1009
Prosonic 1044
Protec 1006
Pye 1046, 1056
Quarter 1001
Quartz 1001, 1047
Quasar 1004, 1035
Quelle 1042, 1046, 1047
Radio Shack 1003
Radio Shack/Realistic
1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008
Radiola 1046
Radix 1003
Randex 1003
RCA 1002, 1004, 1009,
1010, 1014, 1015,
1022, 1032
Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008
Rex 1043
RFT 1046
Roadstar 1045, 1050, 1066
Saba 1043
Saisho 1044, 1050
Salora 1047
Samsung 1002, 1014, 1021,
1027, 1052, 1068,
1070
Sanky 1008
Sansui 1007, 1011, 1013,
1043
Sanyo 1001, 1002, 1014,
1047
SBR 1046
Schaub Lorenz 1042, 1043, 1047
Schneider 1042, 1044, 1045,
1046, 1050
Scott 1012
Sears 1001, 1003, 1004,
1010
SEG 1050
SEI-Sinudyne 1046
Seleco 1043
Sentron 1050
Sharp 1008, 1023, 1028,
1053, 1073
Shintom 1006, 1047, 1050
Shivaki 1045
Shogun 1002, 1014
Siemens 1045, 1047
Signature 2000 1008
Silva 1045
Singer 1004, 1006
Sinudyne 1046
Sontec 1045
Sony 1016, 1019, 1055,
1060, 1064, 1074
STS 1004, 1010
Sunkai 1044
Sunstar 1042
Suntronic 1042
Sunwood 1050
Sylvania 1004, 1005, 1031,
1041
Symphonic 1005
Taisho 1044
Tandy 1001
Tashiko 1003, 1042
Tatung 1007, 1042, 1043,
1046, 1066
TCM 1044, 1048
Teac 1005, 1007
Technics 1004, 1048
Teknika 1003, 1004, 1005
Teleavia 1043
Telefunken 1043
Tenosal 1050
Tensai 1042, 1045, 1050
Tevion 1044, 1048
Thomson 1043, 1058
Thorn 1043, 1047
TMK 1002, 1014
Tokai 1045, 1050
Tonsai 1050
Toshiba 1013, 1024, 1029,
1043, 1046, 1066,
1075
Totevision 1002, 1003, 1014
Towada 1050
Towika 1050
Uher 1045
Unitech 1002, 1014
Universum 1042, 1045, 1046
Vector Research 1000
Video Concepts 1000
Videon 1044, 1048
Videosonic 1002, 1014
Wards 1002, 1003, 1004,
1005, 1006, 1008,
1010, 1014
Weltblick 1045
White Westinghouse
1013
XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006
Yamaha 1000, 1001, 1007
Yamis h i 1050
Yokan 1050
Yoko 1045, 1050
Zenith 1013, 1026, 1037
RX-V563_G-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, January 16, 2008 8:57 AM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
En
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press CSYSTEM OFF to set this
unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug
from the wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:
Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or like.
21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the
plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and
an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even
if this unit itself is turned off by
CSYSTEM OFF. This
state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit
is designed to consume a very small quantity of power.
Note
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus
may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured
BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be
connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
This symbol mark is according to the
EU directive 2002/96/EC.
This symbol mark means that electrical
and electronic equipment, at their end-
of-life, should be disposed of separately
from your household waste.
Please act according to your local rules
and do not dispose of your old products
with your normal household waste.
1 En
English
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Features ................................................................... 2
Getting started ........................................................ 3
Quick start guide .................................................... 4
Preparation: Check the items ..................................... 4
Step 1: Set up your speakers...................................... 5
Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other
components............................................................ 6
Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button................................... 7
What do you want to do with this unit?..................... 8
Connections ............................................................. 9
Rear panel .................................................................. 9
Placing speakers....................................................... 10
Connecting speakers ................................................ 11
Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13
Information on HDMI™.......................................... 14
Audio and video signal flow.................................... 15
Connecting video components................................. 16
Connecting other components ................................. 17
Connecting audio components................................. 19
Connecting a Yamaha iPod™ universal dock or
Bluetooth™ adapter............................................. 20
Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks............................... 20
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 21
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 21
Connecting the power cable..................................... 22
Turning on and off the power .................................. 23
Front panel display .................................................. 24
Optimizing the speaker setting
for your listening room .................................... 26
Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 26
Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 30
Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 30
Creating your original SCENE templates................ 33
Using remote control on the SCENE feature........... 34
Playback ................................................................ 35
Basic operations....................................................... 35
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT).............................................. 36
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 36
Displaying the current status of this unit
on a video monitor............................................... 37
Using your headphones............................................ 37
Muting the audio output........................................... 37
Playing video sources in the background
of an audio source................................................ 38
Displaying the input source information ................. 38
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 39
Sound field programs ........................................... 40
Sound field program descriptions............................ 40
Using audio features ............................................. 43
Enjoying high quality sound.................................... 43
Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 43
Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 43
Selecting the night listening mode........................... 44
FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 45
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 45
Manual tuning.......................................................... 45
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 46
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 46
Selecting preset stations........................................... 47
Exchanging preset station ........................................ 47
Radio Data System tuning
(Europe and Russia models only) ....................48
Displaying the Radio Data System information ...... 48
Selecting the Radio Data System program type
(PTY SEEK mode).............................................. 49
Using the enhanced other networks (EON) data
service.................................................................. 50
Using a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player .......................................................51
Playback operation .................................................. 51
Using iPod™ ..........................................................53
Controlling iPod™................................................... 53
Using Bluetooth™ components ............................55
Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your
Bluetooth™ component....................................... 55
Playback of the Bluetooth™ component................. 55
Recording ...............................................................56
SET MENU ............................................................57
Using SET MENU................................................... 58
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 59
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 65
3 OPTION MENU................................................... 67
Remote control features........................................71
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 71
Setting remote control codes ................................... 73
Using multi-zone configuration............................74
Connecting Zone 2................................................... 74
Controlling Zone 2................................................... 75
Advanced setup......................................................77
Troubleshooting.....................................................78
Glossary..................................................................88
Specifications .........................................................91
Index .......................................................................92
(at the end of this manual)
Front panel................................................................i
Remote control ....................................................... ii
List of remote control codes ................................. iii
Contents
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
APPENDIX
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the
front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button
names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the
button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications
are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case
of differences between the manual and product, the product has
priority.
•“MSPEAKERS” or “3DVD” (example) indicates the name of the
parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached
sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about
each position of the parts.
• The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding
reference page(s).
Features
2 En
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
90 W/ch
[Other models]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
90 W/ch
SCENE select function
◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations
◆ SCENE template customizing capability
Decoders and DSP circuits
◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of
multi-channel surround sound
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix, Discrete, DTS Neo:6,
DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx
decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
™
Radio tuners
◆ FM/AM tuning capability
◆ Radio Data System capability (Europe model only)
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition
video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) as well as
multi-channel digital audio
DOCK terminal
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth adapter (such
as YBA-10, sold separately).
USB features
◆ USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player
◆ MP3, WMA and WAV capability
Other features
◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for
automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ DIRECT mode for high quality sound for all sources
◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize
this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system
◆ Component video input/output capability
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
◆ S-video signal input/output capability
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ iPod controlling capability
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes
◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility
◆ Bi-amplification connection capability
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
iPod™
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple, Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
DTS-ES | NEO:6 | 96/24. Product “DTS” and “DTS-ES | NEO:6”
are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
“96/24” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is
used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
Features
Getting started
3 En
English
INTRODUCTION
■ Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
❏ Remote control
❏ Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4)
❏ Optimizer microphone
❏ AM loop antenna
❏ Indoor FM antenna
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
1 Take off the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert the two supplied batteries
(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3 Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
• Change all of the batteries if you notice that the operation range
of the remote control decreases.
• Do not use an old battery and a new one together.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control
code.
Getting started
Caution
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE
plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet.
Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may
cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire
hazard.
Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or
counterclockwise to the correct position using a
straight slot screwdriver.
Voltages are as follows:
Asia model ................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
General model
...................... 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
230-
240V
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
Voltage indication
Notes
1
3
2
Quick start guide
4 En
The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy
DVD movie playback in your home theater.
Prepare the following items.
❏ Speakers
❏ Front speaker .....................................x 2
❏ Center speaker ...................................x 1
❏ Surround speaker ..............................x 4
Select magnetically shielded speakers. The
minimum required speakers are two front speakers.
The priority of the requirement of other speakers is
as follows:
1. Two surround speakers
2. Center speaker
3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)
❏ Active subwoofer ...................................x 1
Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA
input jack.
❏ Speaker cable .........................................x 7
❏ Subwoofer cable .....................................x 1
Select a monaural RCA cable.
❏ DVD player ..............................................x 1
Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital
audio output jack and composite video output
jack.
❏ Video monitor..........................................x 1
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector
equipped with a composite video input jack.
❏ Video cable .............................................x 2
Select an RCA composite video cable.
❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ....................x 1
Quick start guide
Front right
speaker
Subwoofer
Surround left
speaker
Front left
speaker
Surround right
speaker
Center speaker
DVD player
Video monitor
Surround back
right speaker
Surround back left
speaker
Enjoy DVD playback!
Step 1: Set up your speakers
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button
☞
P. 6
☞
P. 7
☞
P. 5
Preparation: Check the items
Quick start guide
5 En
English
INTRODUCTION
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
unit.
1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the
room.
2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker.
Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with
a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped
(grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of
your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–”
(black) terminals.
3 Connect each speaker cable to the
corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.
1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are
unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables
together to prevent short circuits.
3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.
4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal
part of this unit.
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel
(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.
Front and center speakers
Surround and surround back speakers
4 Connect the subwoofer cable to the input
jack of the subwoofer and the SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT jack of this unit.
Step 1: Set up your speakers
LR
SURROUND
LR
FRONT B
LR
FRONT ACENTER
LR
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SINGLE
SWITCHED
MONITOR
OUT
L
R
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
MD/
CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
IN
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
IN
MONITOR
OUT
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT S VIDEOIN
CD
L
R
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO
VIDEO
OUTPUT
ZONE 2
OUT
FRONT(6CH)
SB(8CH)
1
2
3
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL MD/CD-R
OUT
DTV/CBL
DVR
DVD
DVD
OPTICAL
4
MD/CD-R
COAXIAL
DVD
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
HDMI
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
VIDEO
DOCK
IN1 IN2
AC OUTLETS
LR
SURROUND
LR
FRONT B
LR
FRONT ACENTER
LR
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SINGLE
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
SPEAKERS
12 3 4
To the front
right speaker
To the front
left speaker
Loosen Insert Tighten
To the center
speaker
To the surround
back right
speaker
To the surround
back left speaker
To the surround
left speaker
To the surround
right speaker
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT jack
Subwoofer cable
Input jack
AV receiver
Subwoofer
Quick start guide
6 En
1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the
digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD
player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL
jack of this unit.
2 Connect the video cable to the composite
video output jack of your DVD player and the
DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.
3 Connect the video cable to the video input
jack of your video monitor and the VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.
4 Connect the power plug of this unit and other
components into the AC wall outlet.
y
This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) for the power supply
of the other components (except Korea model). See page 22 for
details.
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
LR
SURROUND
LR
FRONT B
LR
FRONT ACENTER
LR
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SINGLE
SWITCHED
MONITOR
OUT
L
R
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
MD/
CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
IN
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
IN
MONITOR
OUT
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT S VIDEOIN
CD
L
R
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO
VIDEO
OUTPUT
ZONE 2
OUT
FRONT(6CH)
SB(8CH)
1
2
3
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL CD
OUT
DTV/CBL
DVR
DVD
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DVD
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
HDMI
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
IN1 IN2
AC OUTLETS
4
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
DOCK
MONITOR
OUT
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUTIN
MONITOR
OUT
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT S VIDEOIN
VIDEO
1
2
3
DTV/CBL CDDVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
Make sure that this unit and the DVD
player are unplugged from the AC wall
outlets.
Digital coaxial
audio output jack
Digital coaxial audio
cable
DVD DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL jack
DVD player
AV receiver
Composite video
output jack
Video cable
DVD VIDEO jack
DVD player
AV receiver
■ For further connections
• Using the other kind of speaker
combinations ☞ P. 11
• Connecting video components ☞ P. 16
• Connecting a DVD player ☞ P. 17
• Connecting a DVD recorder ☞ P. 18
• Connecting a set-top box ☞ P. 18
• Connecting a CD player
and a CD recorder/MD recorder ☞ P. 19
• Connecting a multi-format player
or an external decoder ☞ P. 19
• Connecting a Yamaha iPod/Bluetooth dock
☞ P. 20
• Connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
☞ P. 20
• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front
panel ☞ P. 21
• Connecting an FM/AM antenna ☞ P. 21
• Using the USB jack on the front panel
☞ P. 51
Video monitor
AV receiver
Video input
jack
VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jack
Video cable
Quick start guide
7 En
English
INTRODUCTION
1 Turn on the video monitor and then set the
input source selector of the video monitor to
this unit.
2 Press
T
SCENE 1.
This unit is turned on. “DVD Viewing” appears in the
front panel display, and this unit automatically
optimize own status for the DVD playback.
y
The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while
this unit is in the SCENE mode.
3 Start playback of the desired DVD on your
player.
4 Rotate
L
VOLUME to adjust the volume.
When you change the input source or sound field program, the
SCENE mode is deactivated, and the indicator on the selected
SCENE button turns off.
■ About SCENE function
Just by pressing one SCENE button, you can turn on this
unit and recall your favorite input source and sound field
program according to the SCENE template that has been
assigned to the SCENE button. The SCENE templates are
built combinations of input sources and sound field
programs.
y
If you connect a Yamaha product that has capability of the
SCENE control signals, this unit can automatically activate the
component and start playback. Refer to the instruction manual of
the DVD player for further information.
■ Using the other SCENE buttons
*1
You must connect a cable TV or a satellite tuner to this unit in
advance. See page 16 for details.
*2
You need to connect the supplied FM and AM antennas to this
unit in advance. See page 21 for details.
*3
You must tune into the desired radio station. See pages 45 to 47
for the tuning information.
*4
To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected
AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the
indoor FM antenna.
y
If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change
the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See
page 30 for details.
Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button
Note
Default
SCENE
button
The name of the SCENE template
and its description
SCENE
1
DVD Movie Viewing
– input source: DVD
– sound field program: Movie Dramatic
For when you want to enjoy a movie from the
connected DVD player.
SCENE
2
Music Disc Listening
– input source: DVD
– sound field program: 2ch Stereo
For when you want to listen to a music disc
from the connected DVD player.
SCENE
3
TV Viewing
*1
– input source: DTV/CBL
– sound field program: STRAIGHT
For when you want to watch a TV program.
SCENE
4
Radio Listening
*2, *3, *4
– input source: TUNER
– sound field program: 7ch Enhancer
For when you want to listen to a music program
from the FM radio station.
Notes
Quick start guide
8 En
■ After using this unit...
Press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front
panel to set this unit to the standby mode.
This unit is set to the standby mode. In the standby mode,
this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to
receive infrared signals from the remote control. To turn
on this unit from the standby mode, press
A
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF (or GPOWER). See page 23 for details.
What do you want to do with this
unit?
■ Customizing the SCENE templates
• Using various SCENE templates ☞ P. 30
• Creating your original SCENE templates
☞ P. 33
■ Using various input sources
• Basic controls of this unit ☞ P. 35
• Enjoying FM/AM radio programs ☞ P. 45
• Using your USB portable device
with this unit ☞ P. 51
• Using your iPod with this unit ☞ P. 53
• Using your Bluetooth components
with this unit ☞ P. 55
■ Using various sound features
• Using various sound field programs
☞ P. 40
• Using the direct mode for the high
quality sound ☞ P. 43
• Customizing the sound field programs
☞ P. 42
■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
parameters for your listening room (AUTO
SETUP) ☞ P. 26
• Manually adjusting various parameters of
this unit ☞ P. 57
• Setting the remote control ☞ P. 71
• Adjusting the advanced parameters ☞ P. 77
■ Additional features
Automatically turning off this unit ☞ P. 39
Connections
9 En
English
PREPARATION
Connections
Rear panel
LR
SURROUND
LR
FRONT B
LR
FRONT ACENTER
LR
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SINGLE
SWITCHED
MONITOR
OUT
L
R
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
MD/
CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
IN
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
IN
MONITOR
OUT
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT S VIDEOIN
CD
L
R
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO
VIDEO
OUTPUT
ZONE 2
OUT
FRONT(6CH)
SB(8CH)
1
2
3
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
4
MD/CD-R
OUT
DTV/CBL
DVR
DVD
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DVD
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
HDMI
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
VIDEO
DOCK
IN1 IN2
AC OUTLETS
1
2 4 53 6 7
EA D FCB08 9
Name Page
1 HDMI jacks 14
2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks 13
3 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack 13
4 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks 13
5 DOCK terminal 20
6 Speaker terminals 11
7 VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
3
8 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks 20
9
TRIGGER OUT jack
—
This is a control expansion jack for custom
installation.
0 AUDIO jacks 13
A VIDEO jacks 13
B MULTI CH INPUT jacks 19
C ZONE 2 OUT jacks 74
D SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack 11
E ANTENNA terminals 21
F AC OUTLET(S) 22
10 En
Connections
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the
ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a
center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.
Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction
of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is
not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front
speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.
Placing speakers
FR
FL
SBR
SBL
SL
SR
C
SW
60˚
30˚
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
30 cm (12 in) or more
11 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.
Connecting speakers
Caution
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the AC power plug is disconnected from the AC wall outlet.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage
this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front
panel display when you turn on this unit.
• Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the
speakers away from the monitor.
LR
SURROUND
LR
FRONT B
LR
FRONT ACENTER
LR
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SINGLE
SWITCHED
MONITOR
OUT
L
R
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
MD/
CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
IN
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
IN
MONITOR
OUT
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT S VIDEOIN
CD
L
R
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO
VIDEO
OUTPUT
ZONE 2
OUT
FRONT(6CH)
SB(8CH)
1
2
3
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL MD/CD-R
OUT
DTV/CBL
DVR
DVD
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DVD
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
AM
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
COMPONENT VIDEO ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
HDMI
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
IN1 IN2
AC OUTLETS
4
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
DOCK
Front speakers
(FRONT A)
Surround speakers
Subwoofer
Right
Center
speaker
When you use single surround
back speaker, connect the
speaker to the left SURROUND
BACK terminal (SINGLE).
Left
Left
Left
Right
Right
FRONT B terminals
Connect the alternative front speaker system
(FRONT B).
Surround back speakers
12 En
Connections
■ Before connecting to the SPEAKERS
terminal
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)
terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain
cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation
from the end of each speaker cable and then
twist the bare wires of the cable together to
prevent short circuits.
■ Connecting to the FRONT A terminals
1 Loosen the knob.
2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into
the hole on the terminal.
3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
Connecting the banana plug
(except Europe, Russia, Korea, and Asia models)
The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector
widely used to terminate speaker cables. First, tighten the
knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the
end of the corresponding terminal.
■ Using bi-amplification connections
This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections
to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support
bi-amplification.
To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT
and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To
activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP”
to “ON” in “Advanced setup” (see page 77).
• When you make the conventional connection, make sure that
the shorting bars are put into the terminals appropriately. Refer
to the instruction manuals of the speakers for details.
• When you use bi-amplification connections, you can not use
surround back speakers.
10 mm (3/8”)
1
2
3
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Banana plug
Caution
Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the
LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter)
crossovers.
Notes
LR
FRONT A
LR
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
SINGLE
This unit
Left
Right
Front speakers
13 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
Connect one of the type of the audio jack(s) and/or video jack(s) that your input components are equipped with.
■ Audio jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jack
For digital audio signals transmitted via a coaxial digital
audio cable.
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. Optical input jacks are compatible with digital
signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency.
• This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus
audio signals input at the digital jacks are not output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into the luminance (Y)
and chrominance (P
B, PR) video signals transmitted on
separate wires of component video cables.
The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT (REC) jacks.
Information on jacks and cable plugs
VIDEO S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
PB
PR
Y
S
V
COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
R
L
C
O
R
L
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
Composite
video cable
plug
Component
video cable
plugs
Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs
(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Red) (Blue) (Green)
S-video
cable plug
Notes
Note
PR PB Y PR PB Y
Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
Through
Video conversion ON
(see page 67)
14 En
Connections
■ HDMI compatibility with this unit
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video
and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of
the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or
DVI components.
• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI
connection (see page 38).
■ HDMI jack and cable plug
y
• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16
feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack
↔ DVI-D jack) to connect
this unit to other DVI components.
• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of
the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of
this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt
playback or cause noise.
• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN DVD
or HDMI IN DTV/CBL jack of this unit cannot be digitally
output at the HDMI OUT jack.
• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the
HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to
establish the connection to the component.
Information on HDMI™
Audio signal
types
Audio signal
formats
Compatible
HDMI
components
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch Linear
PCM
8ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, etc.
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.
This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following
standards:
• HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia
Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by
HDMI Licensing, LLC.
• HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection
System) licensed by Digital Content Protection,
LLC.
Notes
Notes
HDMI
HDMI cable plug
15 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
■ Audio signal flow
• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS signals input at the HDMI IN DVD or HDMI IN
DTV/CBL jack can be output at the HDMI OUT jack only
when “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “Other” (see page 64).
• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the
AUDIO output and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
■ Video signal flow
• When the all video signals are input at the HDMI,
COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the
priority order of the input signals is as follows:
1. HDMI
2. COMPONENT VIDEO
3. S VIDEO
4. VIDEO
• When some digital video signals are input at the HDMI IN
DVD or HDMI IN DTV/CBL jack, the video conversion
function does not work.
• Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN DVD or HDMI IN
DTV/CBL jack cannot be output from analog video output
jacks.
Audio and video signal flow
Notes
HDMI
AUDIO
DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)
DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)
OutputInput
Analog output
Digital output
Notes
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
Through
OutputInput
Video conversion ON (see page 67)
16 En
Connections
Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack,
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR
OUT jack of this unit.
y
You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or
on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack
of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND
MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio
signals (see page 64).
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI
connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals
being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the
HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.
• When you connect your TV monitor or projector via HDMI
connection, the OSD does not appear. In such cases, connect the
TV monitor or projector via component, S-video or video
connection.
• Connect the input source components to the HDMI IN DVD or
HDMI IN DTV/CBL jack to display the video images on the
video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Connecting video components
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
Notes
MONITOR
OUT
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
D
/
-R
OUT
(REC)
OUTIN
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT
M
AX.
IN
MONITOR
OUT
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT S VIDEOIN
CD
L
R
SUB
WOOFER
W
O
SURROUND
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO
VIDEO
OUTPUT
ZONE 2
OUT
FRONT(6CH)
SB(8CH)
1
2
3
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL MD/CD-R
OUT
DTV/CBL
DVR
V
D
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DVD
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
O
TE
G
ER
U
T
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
IN1 IN2
4
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO
PR PB
V
S
Y
TV (or projector)
Video in
Component
video in
S-video in
HDMI in
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
(One for the video connection,
and one for the audio connection)
17 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 67), be sure
to make the same type of video connections as those made for
your TV (see page 16). For example, if you connected your TV
to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your
other components to the VIDEO jacks.
• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 67), the
converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT
jacks. To record a source, make the same type of video
connections between each component.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the
default component assigned to DIGITAL INPUT jack, select
the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL IN” or “COAXIAL
IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 65).
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT
(OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks,
priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) jack.
■ Connecting a DVD player
Connecting other components
Notes
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
MONITOR
OUT
L
R
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
MD/
CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
IN
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
IN
MONITOR
OUT
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT S VIDEOIN
CD
L
R
SUB
WOOFER
W
O
SURROUND
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO
VIDEO
OUTPUT
ZONE 2
OUT
FRONT(6CH)
SB(8CH)
1
2
3
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL MD/CD-R
OUT
DTV/CBL
DVR
DVD
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DVD
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
IN1 IN2
4
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
L
R
DVD
DVD DVD
S VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO
1
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
IN1
LR
C
V
S
PR PB Y
DVD player
HDMI out
Component
video out
S-video out
Video out
Audio out
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
(One for the video connection,
and one for the audio connection)
Coaxial out
18 En
Connections
■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR
■ Connecting a set-top box
MONITOR
OUT
L
R
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
MD/
CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
IN
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
IN
MONITOR
OUT
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT S VIDEOIN
CD
L
R
SUB
WOOFER
W
O
SURROUND
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO
VIDEO
OUTPUT
ZONE 2
OUT
FRONT(6CH)
SB(8CH)
1
2
3
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL MD/CD-R
OUT
DTV/CBL
DVR
DVD
DVD
DVD
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
IN1 IN2
MD/CD R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
L
R
DVR
OUT
IN
DVR
OUTIN
DVR
OUT S VIDEOIN
AUDIO
VIDEO
DVR
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
V
R
L
R
L
S
S
V
PR PB Y
S-video in
S-video out
Video out
Audio out
Audio in
Video in
Component video out
DVD recorder,
PVR or VCR
MONITOR
OUT
L
R
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
MD/
CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
IN
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
IN
MONITOR
OUT
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT S VIDEOIN
CD
L
R
SUB
WOOFER
W
O
SURROUND
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO
VIDEO
OUTPUT
ZONE 2
OUT
FRONT(6CH)
SB(8CH)
1
2
3
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL MD/CD-R
OUT
DTV/CBL
DVR
DVD
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DVD
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
IN1 IN2
4
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
L
R
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL DTV/CBL
S VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
IN2
2
DTV/CBL
OPTICAL
O
V
L R
S
PR PB Y
Satellite receiver, cable TV
receiver or HDTV decoder
HDMI out Component video out
Audio out
S-video out
Video out
Optical out
indicates recommended
connections
indicates alternative connections
(One for the video connection,
and one for the audio connection)
19 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
Connect the audio components as follows.
■ Connecting a CD player and a CD
recorder/MD recorder
• When you connect your CD player via analog and digital
connection, priority is given to the signal input at the DIGITAL
INPUT jack.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the
default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT jack,
select the corresponding setting in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see
page 65).
■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or
pre-amplifier.
If you set “INPUT CH” to “8ch” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 67), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT”
in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 67) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 36), this unit automatically
turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
*1
The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 67).
Connecting audio components
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
Notes
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
Notes
MONITOR
OUT
L
R
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
MD/
CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
IN
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUT
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
IN
DTV/CBL DVRDVD
OUTIN
CD
L
R
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUTAUDIO
VIDEO
FRONT(6CH)
SB(8CH)
1
2
3
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL CD
OUTDVD
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DVD
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
REMOTE
TRIGGER
OUT
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
IN1 IN2
4
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
L
R
MD/
CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
CD
AUDIO
3
CD
OPTICAL
DIGITAL INPUT
4
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
L
R
O
O
R
L
L
R
CD playerCD recorder or
MD recorder
Audio out
Optical out
Audio in
Audio out
Optical in
SB(8CH)
FRONT(6CH)
CENTER
SURROUND
SUB
WOOFER
L
R
L
R
SB(8CH)
FRONT(6CH)
CENTER
SURROUND
SUB
WOOFER
L
R
MULTI CH INPUT
MULTI CH INPUT
L R LR
L R LRL R
*1
Subwoofer out
Multi-format player/External
decoder (5.1-channel output)
Center out
Surround out
Front out
Multi-format player/External
decoder (7.1-channel output)
Front out
Subwoofer out
Center out
Surround back out
Surround out
20 En
Connections
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear
panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth
adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately). Connect a
Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth adapter to the
DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its
dedicated cable.
When the components are the Yamaha products and have
the capability of the transmission of the remote control
signals, connect the REMOTE IN jack and REMOTE
OUT jack to the remote control input and output jack with
the monaural analog mini cable as follows.
y
• If the components have the capability of the SCENE control
signals, this unit can automatically activate the corresponding
components and start the playback when you use one of the
SCENE buttons. Refer to the owner’s manuals for details about
the capability of the SCENE control signals of the components.
• If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not
the Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the advanced setup
menu to “OFF” (see page 77).
Connecting a Yamaha iPod™
universal dock or Bluetooth™
adapter
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
R
SURROUND BA
C
DTV/CBL
DVR
Y
AM
GND
ANTENNA
DOCK
DOCK
Yamaha iPod universal dock
or Bluetooth adapter
Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
IN
DVD
REMOTE
IN1
OUT
IN
REMOTE
Yamaha
component
(CD or DVD
player, etc.)
Remote
control in
Remote
control out
Infrared signal
receiver or
Yamaha
component
21 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit.
• To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
• When audio signals are input at the AUDIO jacks and the
DOCK terminal on the rear panel, the priority order of the input
signal is as follows:
1. DOCK
2. AUDIO
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated
terminals. In general, these antennas should provide
sufficient signal strength.
y
See page 22 for connection information of the supplied AM loop
antenna.
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the
front panel
Caution
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other
components before making connections.
Notes
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
ON/OFF
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
A/B/C/D/E
BAND
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
ZONE
CONTROL
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
AUDIO SELECT
DIRECTSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
MAIN ZONE
SYSTEM OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX USB
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
V
L
R
Game console or
video camera
Video
output
Audio
output
Connecting the FM and AM
antennas
Notes
CENTE
R
O
SUB
WOOFER
P
UT
AM
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
ANTENNA
DOCK
AM
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
ANTENNA
Indoor FM
antenna
(supplied)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the
antenna
GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth
ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.
AM loop
antenna
(supplied)
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33
ft) vinyl-covered wire
extended outdoors from a
window.
22 En
Connections
Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna
y
The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity
and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND
terminal.
Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna
The types of the supplied AM loop antenna is different
depending on the models.
Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable
into the AC wall outlet.
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
Australia model...................................................... 1 outlet
Korea model............................................................... None
Other models......................................................... 2 outlets
Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of your other
components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is
supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to
these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is set to the standby
mode. For information on the maximum power or the total
power consumption of the components that can be
connected to these outlet(s), see “Specifications” on
page 91.
Note
Open the lever
Insert
Close the lever
Connecting the power cable
SWITCHED
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
AC OUTLETS
Power cable
23 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
■ Turning on this unit
Press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or
G
POWER)
to turn on this unit.
y
When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
■ Set this unit to the standby mode
Press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or
H
STANDBY) to set this unit to the standby
mode.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
y
You can set the main zone and zone 2 to the standby mode
simultaneously by pressing CSYSTEM OFF.
Turning on and off the power
24 En
Connections
1 HDMI indicator
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is
input at the HDMI IN jacks (see page 14).
2 DOCK indicator
• Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see
page 20) and V-AUX is selected as the input source.
• Flashes while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter
(such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth
component is in the paring (see page 55) or the
Bluetooth adapter is searching the Bluetooth
component (see page 55).
• Lights up while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth
adapter is connected to the Bluetooth component (see
page 20).
3 ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
selected (see page 40).
4 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
5 YPAO indicator
Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the
speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without
any modifications (see page 26).
6 Tuner indicators
Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode
(see pages 45 to 47).
7 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
8 MUTE indicator and VOLUME level indicator
• The MUTE indicator flashes while the MUTE function
is on (see page 37).
• Indicates the current volume level.
9 PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) digital audio signals.
0 Decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the
decoders of this unit function.
A Headphone indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 37).
B SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers activated
(see page 35).
SP A: The FRONT A speakers are activated.
SP B: The FRONT B speakers are activated.
C ZONE2 indicator
Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 75).
Front panel display
MUTE
ms
dB
ft
VOL.
dB
PCM
96/24
VIRTUAL
AUTO
YPAO
MEMORY
TUNED
STEREO
EONCTRTPTYPSHOLDPTY
SLEEP
USB
MULTI CH
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
MATRIX DISCRETE
ES
DOCK ENHANCER
SILENT
CINEMA
ZONE 2
SP
A B
96
24
q
PL x
LFE
LL C R
SL SB SR
SBRSBL
q
EX
q
DIGITAL PLUS
G
HFECB DA09
12345678
25 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
D CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a sound field program (see
page 41).
VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 41).
SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a
sound field program is selected (see page 41).
E Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
F SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 39).
G Radio Data System indicators
(Europe and Russia models only)
PTY HOLD
Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System
stations in the PTY SEEK mode.
PS, PTY, RT and CT
Light up according to the selected Radio Data System
display mode.
EON
Lights up when the EON data service is being
received.
H Input channel and speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
• Indicate the channel components of the current
digital input signal.
• Light up or flash according to the settings of the
speakers when this unit is in the automatic setup
procedure (see page 26) or the speaker level setting
procedure in the “SP LEVEL” (see page 61).
■ Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
y
To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 73.
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
Input channel indicators
LFE
LL C R
SL SB SR
SBRSBL
LFE indicator
Notes
30º 30º
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
26 En
This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid
troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as
possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If
there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be
satisfactory.
y
You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that appears
in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the
OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
1 Make sure of the following check points.
Before starting the automatic setup, check the following
check points.
❏ Speakers are connected appropriately.
❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on.
❏ This unit is selected as the video input source of
the video monitor.
❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the
volume level is set to about half way (or slightly
less).
❏ The crossover frequency controls of the
connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.
❏ FRONT A speakers are selected as the front
speaker system (see page 35).
❏ The room is sufficiently quiet.
2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
The following display appears in the OSD.
3 Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the microphone heading
upward.
y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be
when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the
attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone
to the tripod (etc.).
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
Using AUTO SETUP
Notes
Note
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
MIN MAX
CROSSOVER
HIGH CUT
Controls of a subwoofer (example)
O
/MAN'L
ZONE
CONTROL
OPTIMIZER MIC
AUDIO SELECT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX USB
Optimizer
microphone
AUTO SETUP
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
. START
Automatic
Processing
of all item
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Start
p
p
Optimizer microphone
27 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
English
PREPARATION
4 Make sure that “SETUP” is set to “AUTO”
and the pointer is pointing at “START”.
y
You can also select the following setup methods. In this
case, press
7
k to select “SETUP”, press
7
l / h to
select the one of the following choises and then select
“START”.
Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT
• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO
SETUP” settings and override the previous
settings.
• Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP”
settings and restore the previous settings.
• Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP”
parameters to the initial factory settings.
“RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have
previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.
5 Press
7
n to select “START” and then press
7
ENTER to start the setup procedure.
The following message appears in the OSD.
6 Press
7
ENTER to start the setup
procedure.
This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test
tones are output from each speaker during the auto
setup procedure. Once all items are set, the result
display appears in the OSD.
• During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any
operation on this unit.
• We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in
the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes
for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure.
This unit performs the following checks:
Speaker wiring/volume level WIRING/LEVEL
Checks which speakers are connected and the
polarity of each speaker. Also checks and adjusts the
volume level of each speaker.
Speaker distance DISTANCE
Checks the distance of each speaker from the
listening position and adjusts the timing of each
channel.
Speaker size SIZE
Checks the frequency response of each speaker and
sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each
channel.
Note
Before proceeding next operation
Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the
automatic setup procedure. For more accurate
measurements, keep quiet and move to the wall where
speakers are not around. We recommend that you leave
the listening room during the automatic setup
procedure.
NOTICE
output.
Loudtesttonesare
Pleasekeepquiet
orleavetheroom.
Press[ENTER]
Notes
28 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
The display changes as follows.
The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows.
Number of speakers SP
Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in
the following order:
Front/Back/Subwoofer
Speaker distance DIST
Displays the speaker distance from the listening position
in the following order:
Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance
Speaker level LVL
Displays the speaker output level in the following order:
Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level
• If “E-9:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing
procedure, restart from step 4.
• If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are output.
• If an error occurs during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, the
setup procedure is canceled and an error screen appears. For
details, see “If an error screen appears” on page 29.
• When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO
SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the number of warning
messages appears (see page 29).
7 Press
8
k and
8
ENTER to display the
setup results in detail.
8 Press
8
l / h repeatedly to toggle between
the setup result displays.
y
If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually
adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see
page 57).
The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may be
longer than the actual distance depending on the
characteristics of your speakers.
9 Press
8
ENTER to return to the result
display.
Notes
AUTO SETUP
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
. START
Automatic
Processing
of all item
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Start
p
p
AUTO SETUP
RESULT
SP : 3/2/0.1
DIST: 3.2/3.5m
LVL : -2/+2dB
. SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
>
INITIALIZING
. WIRING/LEVEL
DISTANCE
SIZE
WAITING;;;
;;;;;;;;;;
[]:Exit
[
AUTO SETUP
Note
Results of the speaker
connection and wiring
Results of the speaker
distance from the
listening position
Results of the speaker
size
Results of the speaker
output level
AUTO SETUP
. RESULT
SP : 3/2/0.1
DIST: 3.2/3.5m
LVL : -2/+2dB
SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Detail
>
29 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
English
PREPARATION
10 Press
7
n and then press
7
l / h to select
“SET” or “CANCEL”.
Choices: SET, CANCEL
• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
11 Press
7
ENTER to confirm your selection.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
12 Press
K
MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
13 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from
this unit.
The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it
away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top
of this unit.
y
If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your
listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate
your system.
■ If an error screen appears
Press
7
k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or
“EXIT” and then press
7
ENTER.
The following display is an example where “E-8:USER
CANCEL” appears in the OSD.
Choices: RETRY, EXIT
• Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
• Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
■ If “WARNING” appears
When this unit detects potential problems during the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the
result display. Check the warning messages to correct your
speaker settings.
Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
1 Make sure the pointer is pointing at
“WARNING” and then press
7
ENTER to
display the detailed information about the
warning.
The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates
the number of warning messages.
2 Press
7
l / h repeatedly to toggle between
the warning displays.
y
• For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO
SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 82.
• When the corresponding warning message is not
applicable to a speaker, “–
– –” is displayed instead.
3 Press
7
ENTER to return to the result
display.
SET MENU
TOP MENU
.;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
.A;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
ERROR
. E-8:USER CANCEL
Can't detect
signal at MIC
RETRY EXIT
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Enter
>
Note
AUTO SETUP
. WARNING(2)
RESULT
SP : 3/2/0.1
DIST: 3.2/3.5m
LVL : -2/+2dB
SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Detail
>
WARNING
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
Reverse channel
AAAAFLAAAAA---
AAACENTER
AAAASLAAAAA---
AAAASBLAAAA---
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES
30 En
This unit is equipped with 16 preset SCENE templates for
various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory
setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to
each SCENE button:
SCENE 1: DVD Movie Viewing
SCENE 2: Music Disc Listening
SCENE 3: TV Viewing
SCENE 4: Radio Listening
If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select
the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template
library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE
buttons on the front panel and the remote control.
1 Press and hold the desired TSCENE (or
5SCENE) button for 3 seconds.
The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the
front panel starts to flash, and the name of the
currently assigned SCENE template appears in the
front panel display.
2 Press RINPUT l / h (or press 4AMP and
then press 7l / h) to select the desired
template.
3 Press the TSCENE (or 5SCENE) button
again to confirm the selection.
The selected SCENE template is assigned to the
button.
Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the
corresponding SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input
source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 34
for details.
Selecting the SCENE templates
Selecting the desired SCENE
template
1
SCENE template library
(Image)
Select the desired SCENE
template
Assign the
SCENE
template to the
SCENE button
1
1
1
or
Remote control
Flashes
3 seconds
3 seconds
Front panel
DVD MovieView
Note
l INPUT h
AMP
ENTER
or
Front panel
Remote control
DVD Viewing
1
1
or
Remote controlFront panel
31 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
English
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Which SCENE template would you like to select?
*
When iPod is connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock or a Bluetooth component is connected to the Bluetooth adapter, this unit
plays back the audio sources input at the DOCK terminal.
y
You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 33 for details.
Note
1
2
3
4
Radio Listening
CD Hi-fi Listening
CD Listening
CD Music Listening
Dock Listening
DVD Live Viewing
DVD Movie Viewing
DVD Viewing
Disc Hi-fi Listening
Music Disc Listening
Disc Listening
DVR Viewing
TV Viewing
Game Playing
DVD
V-AUX
*
DTV/CBL
TUNER (FM/AM)
DOCK
CD
DVD
DVR
Video sources
(DVD video,
Recorded video)
TV programs
Video games
iPod or Bluetooth
component
Radio programs
Music discs (CD, SACD
or DVD-Audio)
SCENE templates
Which component do you
like for playback?
Which source do you like to
play back?
Default
SCENE buttons
TV Sports Viewing
USB Audio Listening
USB
USB memory device
or USB portable
audio player
32 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions
The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons in the default setting.
*
When the connected DVD player or CD player has the capability of the SCENE control signals and is connected to the REMOTE
OUT jack of this unit, this unit operates the DVD player or CD player worked with the SCENE features.
SCENE template Input source Playback mode Features
DVD Viewing
DVD
*
STRAIGHT
Select this SCENE template when you play back general
contents on the DVD player.
DVD Movie Viewing
DVD
*
MOVIE
Movie Dramatic
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on
your DVD player.
DVD Live Viewing
DVD
*
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live
video on your DVD player.
DVR Viewing
DVR MOVIE
Movie Dramatic
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on
your digital video recorder.
Disc Hi-fi Listening
DVD
*
DIRECT
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity
sound of the music discs on your DVD player.
Music Disc
Listening
DVD
*
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs
on your DVD player.
Disc Listening
DVD
*
STEREO
7ch Stereo
Select this SCENE template when you play back music
sources on your DVD player as the background music.
CD Hi-fi Listening
CD
*
DIRECT
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity
sound of the music discs on your CD player.
CD Listening
CD
*
STEREO
7ch Stereo
Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs
on your CD player as the background music.
CD Music Listening
CD
*
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Select this SCENE template when you play back music source
on your CD player.
Radio Listening
TUNER MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio
programs.
Dock Listening
DOCK MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
Select this SCENE template when you play back music on
your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth component that is connected to the Bluetooth
adapter.
USB Audio
Listening
USB MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
Select this SCENE template when you play back music on
your USB memory device or a USB portable audio player.
TV Viewing
DTV/CBL STRAIGHT
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general
programs on your TV.
TV Sports Viewing
DTV/CBL ENTERTAINMENT
TV Sports
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs
on your TV.
Game Playing
V-AUX ENTERTAINMENT
Game
Select this SCENE template when you play video games.
11
2
14
13
33 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
English
BASIC
OPERATION
You can create your original SCENE templates for each
SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 16 SCENE
templates to create the original SCENE templates.
■ Customizing the preset SCENE
templates
Use this feature to customize the preset SCENE templates.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press and hold the desired 5SCENE button
for 3 seconds.
The SCENE template customizing screen appears on
the video monitor.
When the SCENE template you want to customize is not
assigned to any of the 5SCENE buttons, press 4AMP
and then press 7l / h repeatedly to recall the desired
SCENE template on the menu screen.
3 Press 4AMP and then
7
k / n to select the
desired parameter of the SCENE template
and then
7
l / h to select the desired value
of the selected parameter.
You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE
template:
• INPUT: The input source component
• MODE: The active sound field programs,
STRAIGHT or DIRECT mode (see
pages 41 and 43)
• NIGHT: The night listening mode setting (see
page 44)
− SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening
mode.
− CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the
CINEMA mode.
− MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the
MUSIC mode.
4 Press the 5SCENE button again to confirm
the edit.
y
An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE
template.
• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the
corresponding 5SCENE buttons, you may need to set the
input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See
page 34 for details.
• You can create a customized SCENE template for each
5SCENE button, and if you create another customized
SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized
SCENE template with the new one.
• The newly created template is only available for the assigned
5SCENE button.
■ Renaming the SCENE templates
Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3
of “Customizing the preset SCENE templates”
and then press 7ENTER.
• Press 7k / n to select the desired character.
•Press
7l / h to place “_” (underscore) under the
space or the desired character.
• Press 8RETURN to cancel the new name.
• Press 7ENTER to confirm the new name.
Creating your original SCENE
templates
Note
: DVD Viewing
: DVD
SCENE
INPUT
SCENE : DVD Viewing
1
SCENE template library
(Image)
Select a SCENE template
Assign to the SCENE
button
Create the original SCENE
template
AMP
1
3 seconds
Notes
1
34 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
■ Controlling the input source
components in the SCENE mode
You can operate both this unit and the input source
component by using the remote control. You must set the
appropriate remote control code for each input source in
advance (see page 73).
1 Press the desired 5SCENE button on the
remote control.
2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below
to control the input source component of the
selected SCENE template.
*
These buttons control the input source component. See page 72
for details of the function of each button.
■ Setting input source of the customized
SCENE template on the remote control
If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE
template, you must set the input source of the SCENE
template on the remote control to operate the input source
component correctly.
Press and hold the 5SCENE button and the
desired input selector button (
3
) for 3 seconds.
y
Press the 5SCENE button again to operate the input source
component.
Using remote control on the SCENE feature
Note
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT DIRECT
PARAMETER
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
BC
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
SRCH MODE
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
MEMORY
AVTV
SCENE
4321
USB
C D
A B
FREQ/TEXT EON
MODE - PTY SEEK - START
SCENE buttons
*
PLAYBACK
35 En
English
BASIC
OPERATION
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press MSPEAKERS repeatedly to select the
front speakers you want to use.
The respective speaker indicators lights up in the
front panel display.
3 Press RINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
one of the input selector buttons (
3
)) to
select the desired input source.
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.
4 Start playback on the selected component or
select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
• See page 45 for details about FM/AM tuning
instructions.
5 Rotate LVOLUME (or press
LVOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume to the
desired output level.
6 Press OPROGRAM l / h repeatedly (or
press 4AMP and then APROG l / h
repeatedly) to select the desired sound field
program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display.
See page 40 for details about sound field programs.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input
source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 36).
• When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48
kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT”
mode (see page 41).
• To display information about the currently selected input source
in the OSD, see page 38 for details.
■ A quick guide to contents
Playback
Caution
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play
back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,
you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player
supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound
output level of your CD player before you play back a
CD encoded in DTS.
Basic operations
USB
MULTI CH
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
INPUT:DVD
Currently selected input
source
Available input sources
Notes
When you want to...
See
page
Enjoy high quality sound 43
Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 43
Adjust the parameters of sound field programs 42
Enjoy the sources with a wide dynamic range at night 44
Use headphones 37
Select a decoder to play back sources with 41
Automatically set this unit to the standby mode 39
Movie Dramatic
Currently selected
surround field program
36 En
Playback
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this
feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input
jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to as the
same input source.
y
• We recommend setting the audio input jack select to “AUTO”
in most cases.
• You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by
using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 68).
Press SAUDIO SELECT (or press 4AMP and
then EAUDIO SEL) repeatedly to select the
desired audio input jack select setting.
This feature is not available when no digital input jacks
(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition,
HDMI is not available as an audio input jack select setting when
the HDMI IN DVD and HDMI IN DTV/CBL jacks are not used.
Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT MENU” to reassign the
respective input jack (see page 65).
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 19) as the input
source.
Press RINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
4AMP and then DMULTI CH IN) to select
MULTI CH.
“MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display.
y
Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the
parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 67).
The input signals are amplified and output directly without sound
processing. Therefore, you cannot activate sound field programs,
the night listening mode, etc. while MULTI CH is selected as the
input source.
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)
AUDIO SELECT Function
AUTO
Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
(1) HDMI
(2) Digital signals
(3) Analog signals
HDMI
Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI
signals are not input, no sound is output.
COAX/OPT
Selects only digital signals. When no
signals are input, no sound is output.
ANALOG
Selects only analog signals. If no analog
signals are input, no sound is output.
Note
USB
MULTI CH
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
A.SEL:AUTO
Currently selected audio input jack select setting
Available input sources
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
Note
37 En
Playback
English
BASIC
OPERATION
You can display the operating information of this unit on a
video monitor.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press MDISPLAY.
The current status screen appears in the OSD.
y
You can select the amount of time that the current status is
displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter in
“OPTION MENU” (see page 68).
The OSD signal is not output at the DVR VIDEO OUT jacks and
will not be recorded.
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on
the front panel.
y
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode
is automatically activated (see page 41).
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
speaker terminals.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
Press IMUTE to mute the audio output. Press
IMUTE again to resume the audio output.
y
• You can also rotate LVOLUME or press LVOLUME +/– to
resume the audio output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE”
parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 63).
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
Displaying the current status of
this unit on a video monitor
Note
[DISPLAY]:STATUSOFF
NIGHT:CINEMA(MID)
A.SEL:HDMI
INPUT:DVD
MovieSpacious
MOVIE
DVDMovieViewing
STATUSVOL:-40dB
Using your headphones
Notes
Muting the audio output
38 En
Playback
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Press the input selector buttons (
4
) to select a
video source and then an audio source.
y
• You can also select “MULTI CH” as the audio source (see
page 36). Press 4AMP and then press DMULTI CH IN.
• Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the
desired setting to select the default background video input
source of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 67).
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
1 Press 4AMP and then KMENU.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press 7n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL
INFO” and then press 7ENTER.
The audio information about the input source appears
in the OSD.
3 Press 7l / h to toggle between the audio
and video information displays.
4 Press KMENU again to exit from “SET
MENU”.
■ Audio information
“–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding
information.
■ Video information
“–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding
information.
HDMI error and message
Playing video sources in the
background of an audio source
Displaying the input source
information
Audio sources
Video sources
DVD
V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
USB
DVD
SET MENU
TOP MENU
.;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
.A;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
Information Descriptions
FORMAT
Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a
digital signal, it automatically switches to
analog input.
SAMPLING
The number of samples per second taken from
a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
CHANNEL
The number of source channels in the input
signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a
multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front
channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
BITRATE
The number of bits passing a given point per
second.
FLAG
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or
PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically
switch decoders.
Note
Information Descriptions
HDMI SIGNAL
Type of the source video signals and the
video signals output at the HDMI OUT
jack of this unit.
HDMI RES.
Resolution of the HDMI signals input or
output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this
unit.
HDMI ERROR
(Only when error
is detected)
Error message for HDMI sources or
connected HDMI devices. See “HDMI
error and message” for details.
Note
Message Cause
DEVICE OVER
The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
HDCP ERROR
HDCP authentication failed.
OUT OF RES.
The connected monitor is not compatible
with the resolution of the input video signal.
39 En
Playback
English
BASIC
OPERATION
Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time.
Press 4AMP and then press RSLEEP
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press RSLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the
amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is
set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound field
program.
y
• To cancel the sleep timer, press 4AMP and then press
RSLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front
panel display.
• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or HSTANDBY) to set the main
zone to the standby mode.
Using the sleep timer
SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
40 En
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital
decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback
from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source.
Press OPROGRAM l / h (or press 4AMP and
then press APROG l / h repeatedly).
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input
source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 36).
• When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48
kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT”
mode (see page 41).
y
Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference,
not merely on the name of the program itself.
The sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the
actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from each
direction.
Sound field programs
Notes
Sound field program descriptions
Category Program Features
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
CINEMA DSP processing. This program presents an image of pop, rock, or jazz live
concert. The sound field reproduces the spaciousness of a massive pavilion with an emphasis
on the vividness of vocals on the stage and solo instruments and the beats of rhythm
instruments.
Hall
CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is suitable for classic and orchestral music. The
program uses data collected in a large concert hall in Munich. You can enjoy delicate and
beautiful reverberation and a majestic atmosphere.
Jazz
CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for jazz and fusion music. It uses data
collected in a famous jazz club in New York. You can enjoy clear reverberation.
ENTERTAINMENT
Game
CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy dynamic and thrilling sound effects as you play
games. The program lets you feel the depth and three-dimensional surrounding sounds of the
field where you are playing, and offers cinema-like surrounding sound effects for the scenes
of movies.
TV Sports
CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy sports relays broadcast in stereo and variety shows
with a live sound environment. For sports relays, the voices of commentators and
announcers come clearly from the center; the cheers and atmosphere in the stadium spread
around within a comfortable range, and you can feel like as if you are in the stadium.
MOVIE
Movie Spacious
CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for movies with an emphasis on
spectacular sound effects, and is a perfect fit with a wide screen. The program reproduces a
wide dynamic range from minimum sound effects to powerful sounds.
Movie Dramatic
CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is also suitable for movies with an emphasis on
three-dimensional sound effects. It restrains reverberation to an moderate extent, but
reproduces sound effects and background music in a soft, three-dimensional manner with
clarity and center orientation of voices as pivots.
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel or plays back 2-channel sources as they are.
7ch Stereo
CINEMA DSP processing. Using this program increases the listening position range. This is
a sound field suitable for background music at parties.
MUSIC
ENHANCER
2ch Enhancer
7ch Enhancer
Select these programs to play back compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) in
2-channel or 7-channel stereo. This program enhances your listening experience by
regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact.
Note
41 En
Sound field programs
English
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Enjoying 2-channel sources using the
standard decoders
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multi-channels.
Press 4AMP and then press OSUR. DECODE
repeatedly to select a decoder.
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the type of source you are playing and your personal
preference.
■ Using sound field programs without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA
DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers by creating
virtual speakers.
If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 60),
Virtual CINEMA DSP is automatically activated
whenever you select a CINEMA DSP program (see
page 40).
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not be activated even when “SUR.
L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 60) in the following cases:
– when “7ch Stereo” (see page 40) is selected.
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and
sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
is automatically activated whenever you connect
headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to
CINEMA DSP sound field programs (except for 7ch) (see
page 40). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
■ Enjoying unprocessed input sources
(Straight decoding mode)
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode,
multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the
appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing. 2-channel stereo sources are output from only
the front left and right speakers.
Press PSTRAIGHT (or press 4AMP and then
press BSTRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”.
To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press
PSTRAIGHT (or press 4AMP and then
BSTRAIGHT) again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears
from the front panel display.
Decoder Functions
Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PLII Movie
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
movie sources
PLII Music
PLIIx Music
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
music sources
PLII Game
PLIIx Game
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
game sources
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources
Note
42 En
Sound field programs
■ Editing sound fields parameters
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory default
parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial
settings, you can change some of the parameters to better
suit the input source or your listening room.
1 While listening to a source, press 4AMP
and then press QPARAMETER.
2 Press 7k / n to select the desired parameter
you want to change.
3 Press 7l / h to change the parameter
value.
You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD”
in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 68).
y
Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.
For Pop/Rock, Hall, Jazz, Game, TV Sports,
Movie Spacious and Movie Dramatic:
DSP level DSP LEVEL
Function: Adjusts the effect level.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
For 2ch Enhancer and 7ch Enhancer
Effect level EFFECT LEVEL
Function: Adjusts the effect level.
Choices: LOW, HIGH
For Pro Logic II Music and Pro Logic IIx Music:
Panorama PANORAMA
Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround
speakers as well as the front speakers for
a wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF, ON
Dimension DIMENSION
Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either
towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the
front), initial setting is STD (standard).
Center width CT WIDTH
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three
front speakers to varying degrees. A
larger value adjusts the center image
towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only
from center speaker) to 7 (center channel
sound is output only from front left and
right speakers), initial setting is 3.
For Neo:6 Music
Center image C.IMAGE
Function: Adjusts the front left and right channel
output relative to the center channel
more or less dominant as necessary.
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0, initial setting is 0.3.
Note
USING AUDIO FEATURES
43 En
English
BASIC
OPERATION
Use the DIRECT mode to enjoy the high quality sounds of
the selected source. When the DIRECT mode is activated,
this unit plays back the selected source with the least
circuitry.
Press QDIRECT (or press 4AMP and then
CDIRECT) to select
“DIRECT”.
• “TONE CONTROL” and “SOUND MENU” (see page 59)
settings (except for speaker level settings) are not effective.
• The front panel display automatically dims.
y
While DIRECT mode is activated, the front panel display turns on
momentarily when an operation is performed.
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front left and right speaker channels.
y
Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.
1 Press NTONE CONTROL repeatedly to
select the high-frequency response
(TREBLE) or the low-frequency response
(BASS).
2 Press OPROGRAM l / h repeatedly to
adjust the high-frequency response
(TREBLE) or the low-frequency response
(BASS).
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the
low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the surround speakers may not match.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when this unit is in the
DIRECT mode, or when MULTI CH is selected as the input
source.
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
This operation will override the level adjustments made in
“AUTO SETUP” (see page 26) and “SP LEVEL” (see page 61).
1 Press 4AMP and then press 6LEVEL on
the remote control and then 7k / n to select
the speaker you want to adjust.
y
• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SUR.B” is displayed if
“SUR.B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1”
(see page 60).
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the
setting of the speakers.
• When the video monitor is turned on, the “SP LEVEL”
adjustment menu appears in the video monitor.
2 Press 7l / h to adjust the speaker output
level.
•Press 7h to increase the value.
•Press 7l to decrease the value.
• Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB
3 Press 6LEVEL to turn off the speaker level
adjustment display.
Using audio features
Enjoying high quality sound
Notes
Adjusting the tonal quality
Notes
Adjusting the speaker level
Note
Display Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
SUR. L
Surround left speaker
SUR. R
Surround right speaker
SB L
Surround back left speaker
SB R
Surround back right speaker
44 En
Using audio features
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night.
1 Press 4AMP and then PNIGHT repeatedly
to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC”.
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF
• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.
y
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
2 Press 7l / h to adjust the effect level while
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is
displayed in the front panel display.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
• Select “MID” for standard compression.
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
y
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are
stored independently.
• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases:
– when the DIRECT mode (see page 43) is selected.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 36).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending
on the input source and surround sound settings you use.
Selecting the night listening mode
Notes
Effect.Lvl:MID
FM/AM TUNING
45 En
English
BASIC
OPERATION
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
1 Press RINPUT l / h repeatedly so that
“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel
display.
2 Press
E
BAND to select the reception band
(FM or AM).
3 Press ITUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the
AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display,
automatic tuning is not possible. Press
DPRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once
to begin automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
If the signal received from the station you want to select is
weak, tune into it manually.
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
1 Press RINPUT l / h repeatedly so that
“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel
display.
2 Press
E
BAND to select the reception band
(FM or AM).
3 Press ITUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the
AUTO indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display,
manual tuning is not possible. Press
DPRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to
tune into the desired station manually.
y
Hold down the button to continue searching.
FM/AM tuning
Automatic tuning
AUTO
AFM 88.90MHz
Lights up
No colon (:)
TUNED
AFM 88.90MHz
Lights up
Manual tuning
Note
AFM 88.90MHz
No colon (:)
46 En
FM/AM tuning
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8
preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station
groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
1 Press RINPUT l / h repeatedly so that
“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel
display.
2 Press
E
BAND to select “FM” as the
reception band.
3 Press and hold HMEMORY for more than 3
seconds.
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
y
You can select the preset station group and the preset station
number where the first received station will be stored by pressing
F
A/B/C/D/E and then GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually
and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on this page.
• Only Radio Data System broadcasting station are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning (Europe and Russia
models only).
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)
manually.
1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.
See page 45 for tuning instructions.
2 Press HMEMORY.
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 30 seconds.
3 Press
F
A/B/C/D/E and
GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly
to select a preset station group (A1 to E8)
while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press HMEMORY while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
Automatic preset tuning
Notes
AUTO
MEMORY
A1:FM 88.90MHz
Flashes
Flashes
Manual preset tuning
Notes
MEMORY
A3:FM 88.90MHz
Preset station
group and
number
Flashes
Colon (:)
TUNED
A1:FM 88.90MHz
The displayed station has been stored as A1.
47 En
FM/AM tuning
English
BASIC
OPERATION
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it was
stored.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, press
4
TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
1 Press FA/B/C/D/E (or 7A/B/C/D/E l / h)
repeatedly to select the desired preset
station group (A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
2 Press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or
7
PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired
preset station number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
y
You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly
by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control.
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” using FA/B/C/D/E
and GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations” on this page.
2 Press and hold
D
PRESET/TUNING for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” using
FA/B/C/D/E and GPRESET/TUNING/CH
l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
4 Press
D
PRESET/TUNING again.
“EXCHANGE E1–A5” appears in the front panel
display and the assignments of the two preset stations
are exchanged.
Selecting preset stations
E1:FM 88.90MHz
Exchanging preset station
MEMORY
E1:FM 88.90MHz
Flashes
Flashes
MEMORY
A5:FM 88.90MHz
Flashes
Flashes
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE AND RUSSIA MODELS ONLY)
48 En
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive various
Radio Data System data such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON
(enhanced other networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations.
Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data
System information: PS (program service), PTY (program
type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The
corresponding indicators light up in the front panel
display.
• You can select one of the Radio Data System display modes
only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicator
lights up in the front panel display. It may take a while for this
unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the
station.
• You can select only the available Radio Data System display
modes being offered by the station.
• If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit
may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In
particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and
may not be available even when the other Radio Data System
display modes are available.
• In case of poor reception conditions, press
I
TUNING
AUTO/MAN’L on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while
this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception
may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front
panel display.
• When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the
program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric
characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters
are displayed with the “_” (underscore).
• If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT
WAIT” appears in the front panel display.
1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using the automatic preset tuning
to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting
stations (see page 46).
• You can also use PTY SEEK mode to tune into the
desired Radio Data System broadcasting station
from the preset ones.
2 Press
0
FREQ/TEXT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data
System display mode.
• Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data
System program currently being received.
• Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data
System program currently being received.
• Select “RT” to display the information on the
Radio Data System program currently being
received.
• Select “CT” to display the current time.
Radio Data System tuning
(Europe and Russia models only)
Displaying the Radio Data System
information
Notes
CTRTPTYPS
Frequency display
49 En
Radio Data System tuning (Europe and Russia models only)
English
BASIC
OPERATION
Use this feature to select the desired radio program by
program type from the all preset Radio Data System
broadcasting stations.
y
Use the automatic preset tuning feature to preset Radio Data
System broadcasting stations (see page 46).
1 Press
3
TUNER on the remote control to
select “TUNER” as the input source.
2 Press 0PTY SEEK MODE on the remote
control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK
mode.
The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in
the front panel display.
y
To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press 0PTY SEEK
MODE on the remote control again.
3 Press 7PRESET/CH k / n on the remote
control to select the desired program type.
The name of the selected program type appears in the
front panel display.
Selecting the Radio Data System
program type (PTY SEEK mode)
Flashes
NEWS
Program type Descriptions
NEWS
News
AFFAIRS
Current affairs
INFO
General information
SPORT
Sports
EDUCATE
Education
DRAMA
Drama
CULTURE
Culture
SCIENCE
Science
VARIED
Light entertainment
POP M
Popular music
ROCK M
Rock music
M.O.R. M
Middle-of-the-road music
(easy-listening)
LIGHT M
Light classics
CLASSICS
Serious classics
OTHER M
Other music
Lights up
POP M
50 En
Radio Data System tuning (Europe and Russia models only)
4 Press 0PTY SEEK START on the remote
control to start searching for all the available
Radio Data System preset stations.
The name of the selected program type flashes and
the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel
display while this unit is searching for stations.
y
To stop searching for stations, press 0PTY SEEK START
on the remote control again.
• This unit stops searching for stations when a station
broadcasting the selected program type is found.
• If the station found is not the one you desire, press 0PTY
SEEK START again to resume searching for another
station broadcasting the same program type.
Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other
networks) data service of the Radio Data System station
network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System
program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this
unit automatically searches for all the available preset
stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data
service of the selected program type for a certain duration
of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this
unit automatically switches to the local station
broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back
to the national station once the EON data service ends.
• You can use this feature only when the EON data service is
available.
• The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only
when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data
System station.
1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
2 Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front
panel display.
If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel
display, select another Radio Data System program so
that the EON indicator lights up.
3 Press 0EON on the remote control
repeatedly to select one of the 4 Radio Data
System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS,
INFO or SPORT).
The name of the selected program type appears in the
front panel display.
y
To cancel the EON feature, press 0EON on the remote
control repeatedly until the name of the program type
disappears and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel
display.
Notes
POP M
PTY HOLD
Flashes Lights up
Using the enhanced other
networks (EON) data service
Notes
EON
NEWS
Lights up
USING A USB MEMORY DEVICE OR A USB PORTABLE AUDIO PLAYER
51 En
English
BASIC
OPERATION
Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit.
■ Supported USB devices
This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (except
USB hard disk drives) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
• Only the first partition (32 GB or less) is displayed in the OSD.
You cannot select files in other partitions.
• Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per
directory are recognized.
• Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the
requirements.
• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may
be noisy when played.
■ Connecting a USB memory device or a
USB potable audio player
Connect a USB jack of a USB memory device or
USB portable audio player to the USB port on the
front panel of this unit.
Follow the procedures below to enjoy the music stored in
your USB device or a USB portable audio player.
1 Press
R
INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
3USB) to select USB.
The cursor on the left of the USB indicator lights up
in the front panel display, and the contents previously
played is automatically played.
2 Press MDISPLAY to display the top USB file
list.
The USB file list appears in the OSD.
y
•“i” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that
there is a submenu available in the next menu level.
• When this unit is in the top directory, “Root” appears
beside “USB”.
Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player
Notes
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
ON/OFF
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
A/B/C/D/E
BAND
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
ZONE
CONTROL
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
AUDIO SELECT
DIRECTSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
MAIN ZONE
SYSTEM OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX USB
USB
USB memory device
or USB portable
audio player
Playback operation
USB
MULTI CH
DVR
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
INPUT:USB
Lights up
Ellis Margellis >
Frankie Zipper >
Hall in Call >
Jackie Pastarius >
Jmiel >
Jean-Luc Ponta >
Jim Hallo >
1/7
USB Root
52 En
Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player
3 Press
7
k / n / l / h on the remote control
to select the desired file.
• Press
7
k / n to select the desired file/folder.
• Press
7
ENTER
or
7
h to enter the selected
folder.
• Press
7
l to return to the previous folder level.
4 Press 7ENTER to play the selected file.
y
• You can use
0
b / a to skip backward/forward and
9
h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu
in the OSD.
• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the
“USB PLAY STYLE” parameters in “OPTION MENU” (see
page 70).
• You can select the display mode in the front panel display by
using “FL SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 68).
■ The function of the play information
display
[1] Name of the artist
[2] Name of the album
[3] Name of the song
[4] Elapsed time
When the elapsed time exceed “99:59”, “--:--” appeared
instead of the time.
[5] (playback) icon
[6] (all repeat), (single repeat) icons
When “REPEAT” of the “USB PLAY STYLE” in “OPTION
MENU” (see page 70) is set to “OFF”, no icon appears in the
top right corner while files or folders are being played.
[7] (shuffle) icon
When “SHUFFLE” of the “USB PLAY STYLE” in
“OPTION MENU” (see page 70) is set to “OFF”, no icon
appears in the top right corner while files or holders are being
played.
Note
USB [Play]
FrankieZipper
. Made-to-orderaaaaaAA
;RoadtoIndiaaaAAAA
.A
00:00
All
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
All
1
USING IPOD™
53 En
English
BASIC
OPERATION
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 20), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You
can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts
(such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 20).
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
y
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in
“Troubleshooting” on page 85.
• Once your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod.
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
• Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with
the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode).
■ Remote control operation ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote
mode
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,
stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without
the aid of the OSD of this unit.
y
• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod
(some models only).
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
Using iPod™
Notes
Controlling iPod™
Before performing the following operations, press
3V-AUX/DOCK.
Button Function
7 ENTER Subsequent menu
k Menu up
n Menu down
l Previous menu
h Subsequent menu
9 ll Search backward (Press and hold)
hh
Search forward
(Press and hold)
b Skip backward
a Skip forward
s Stop
e Pause (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
p Play (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
K MENU Previous menu
M DISPLAY Display
54 En
Using iPod™
■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse
mode
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod
using the supplied remote control when you connect this
unit and a monitor using the S VIDEO or VIDEO
connection. You can browse the songs stored on your iPod
in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for
your iPod to suit your personal preferences.
y
• The name of the song being played also appears in the front
panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in
“OPTION MENU” (see page 68).
• You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play
information is displayed in the OSD by using the
“OSD-SOURCE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 68)
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.
• The Yamaha logo appears in the display window of your iPod.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front
panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are
replaced with underscores “_”.
• The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in
the OSD. Press 7ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the
“Settings” parameter settings.
• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your
iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy
watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.
1 Press 3V-AUX/DOCK and then
M
DISPLAY.
The following display appears in the OSD.
2 Press
7
k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod
menu and then press 7ENTER to begin
playback of the selected song.
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums
(albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres),
Composers (composers), Settings (settings)
• Playlists > Songs
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat
Shuffle Shuffle
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in
random order.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random
order.
• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in
random order.
y
When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” appears
in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.
Repeat Repeat
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: Off, One, All
• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
y
When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” or “ ”
appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of
songs are being repeated.
■ The function of the play information
display
[1] Playback status
[2] Track number/total tracks
[3] Artist name
[4] Song title
[5] Progress bar
[6] Elapsed time
[7] Shuffle and repeat icons
[8] (playback), (pausing), (search
forward) and (search backward)
[9] Name of the album
[10] Remaining time
Notes
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
Settings
iPod Top
1 All
iPod[Play]
1/9
FrankieZipper
Made-to-order
RoadtoIndia
||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
0:51-7:44
All
[2]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
USING BLUETOOTH™ COMPONENTS
55 En
English
BASIC
OPERATION
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and
enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between
this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth adapter and your
Bluetooth component in advance.
Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth
component with the Bluetooth adapter connected to this
unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been
deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a
Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications.
y
• You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you
use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth adapter.
• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other
component with which Bluetooth communications are to be
established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s
operating instructions.
There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “START
PAIRING” in “SET MENU” and quick pairing.
■ Pairing by using “SET MENU”
Use this feature to perform pairing with the video monitor.
Select “START PAIRING” in “INPUT MENU”. See
page 69 for details.
■ Quick pairing
1 Press RINPUT
l / h repeatedly (or press
3V-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the
input source.
2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want
to pair with.
3 Press and hold EBAND (or 6BAND) for 3
seconds to start pairing.
Once the Bluetooth adapter starts pairing,
“Searching...” appears for a moment. While the
Bluetooth adapter is in the pairing mode, DOCK
indicator flashes in the front panel display.
y
To cancel the pairing, press EBAND (or 6BAND) again.
If the Bluetooth adapter is not connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit, “No BT adapter” appears in the front
panel display.
4 Check that the Bluetooth component detects
the Bluetooth adapter.
If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth
adapter, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in
the Bluetooth device list.
5 Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth
device list and then enter the pass key
“0000” on the Bluetooth component.
When the pairing procedure is successful,
“Completed” appears in the front panel display.
The Yamaha Bluetooth adapter can be paired with up to eight
Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully
with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the
pairing data for the least recently used other component is
cleared.
1 Press RINPUT
l / h repeatedly (or press
3V-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the
input source.
2 Start playback of your Bluetooth component.
When the connected Bluetooth adapter detects the
Bluetooth component, “BT connected” and the
DOCK indicator appears in the front panel display.
y
• When you press 7ENTER, the connected Bluetooth adapter
searches and connect to the last connected Bluetooth
component. If the Bluetooth adapter cannot find the Bluetooth
component, “Not found” appears in the front panel display.
• To disconnect the Bluetooth adapter from the Bluetooth
component, press 8RETURN.
Using Bluetooth™ components
Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter
and your Bluetooth™ component
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the
pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully
understand all the instructions before starting.
Note
Note
Playback of the Bluetooth™
component
RECORDING
56 En
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• TONE CONTROL (see page 43) and VOLUME settings, speaker levels (see page 43) and the sound field programs (see page 40) do
not affect recorded material.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Therefore, if
your source component is connected to provide only digital signals, you cannot record the source.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an
S-video or a composite video signal on your DVD recorder.
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.
• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep the component turned on while using this unit. If the component is
turned off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
1 Turn on all the connected components.
2 Press RINPUT
l / h repeatedly (or press
one of the input selector buttons (3)) to
select the source component you want to
record from.
3 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
Recording
Notes
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
SET MENU
57 En
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP
Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 26).
■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU
Input menu 2 INPUT MENU
SET MENU
Parameter Features Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the
crossover frequency, and the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B
terminals.
59
B)SP LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
61
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
62
D)CENTER GEQ
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
62
E)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
62
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
63
G)AUDIO SET
Adjusts the muting level, audio delay, maximum volume level and initial volume level.
63
H)HDMI SET
Selects whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI
component connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
64
I)EXTD SUR.
Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the
Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders by using the connected
surround back speakers.
64
Parameter Features Page
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.
65
B)INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the input source.
66
C)VOLUME TRIM
Adjusts the output volume of each input source.
66
D)DECODER MODE
Selects the decoder mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the
rear panel of this unit.
66
E)MULTI CH SET
Selects the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
67
58 En
SET MENU
Option menu 3 OPTION MENU
■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO
Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 38).
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is
reproducing sound.
1 Press
4
AMP and then press
K
MENU to
enter “SET MENU”.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press
7
k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”.
3 Press
7
ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.
The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the
OSD.
4 Press
7
k / n / l / h and
7
ENTER to select
and change the parameter.
•Press
7
k / n to select the desired menu or
parameter.
•Press
7
l / h to change the parameter value.
•Press
7
ENTER to enter the selected menu or to
confirm the parameter.
•Press
8
RETURN to return to the previous menu
level.
5 Press
K
MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
Parameter Features Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display and the way in which the iPod information
is displayed.
67
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.
68
C)AUDIO SELECT
Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
68
D)PARAM. INI
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
69
E)BLUETOOTH SET
Pair the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with a
Bluetooth component (see page 55).
69
F)USB PLAY STYLE
Adjusts the playback style of a USB source.
70
Using SET MENU
SET MENU
TOPAMENU
.;AUTO SETUP
.A;MANUAL SETUP
;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
SET MENU
TOPAMENU
;AUTO SETUP
.A;MANUAL SETUP
;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
;MANUAL SETUP
. 1 SOUND MENU
2 INPUT MENU
3 OPTION MENU
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ENTER]:Enter
59 En
SET MENU
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using
LCD monitors or projectors.
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.
FRONT B speaker setting FRONT B
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the FRONT B terminals.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
• Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the FRONT B
terminals are set in the main zone.
• Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the
FRONT B terminals are set in another zone. If
SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is
turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at
the FRONT B terminals only.
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the
sound is output from both headphones and the FRONT B
terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”.
• If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to
“ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA
DSP mode (see page 41).
Front speakers FRONT SP
Choices: SMALL, LARGE
When the front speakers are large
Select “LARGE” (large).
When the front speakers are small
Select “SMALL” (small).
When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT” (see page 60), you
can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of
“FRONT SP” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance,
this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”.
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
When the center speaker is large
Select “LRG” (large).
When the center speaker is small
Select “SML” (small).
When you do not use the center speaker
Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are
directed to the front left and right speakers.
1 SOUND MENU
Notes
;MANUAL SETUP
1 SOUND MENU 1/2
. A)SPEAKER SET
B)SP LEVEL
C)SP DISTANCE
D)CENTER GEQ
E)LFE LEVEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ENTER]:Enter
;MANUAL SETUP
1 SOUND MENU 2/2
. F)DYNAMIC RANGE
G)AUDIO SET
H)HDMI SET
I)EXTD SUR.
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ENTER]:Enter
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
FRONT B;;;;FRONT
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
p
p
Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger:
large
Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm
(6.5 in): small
Note
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
FRONT SP
SMALL >LARGE
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
CENTER SP
NONE >SML LRG
60 En
SET MENU
Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
When the surround speakers are large
Select “LRG” (large).
When the surround speakers are small
Select “SML” (small).
When you do not use the surround speakers
Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual
CINEMA DSP mode (see page 41).
Surround back left/right speakers
SUR.B L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2
When the surround back left and right
speakers are large
Select “LRGx2” (large x 2).
When the single surround back speaker is
large
Select “LRGx1” (large x 1).
When the surround back left and right
speakers are small
Select “SMLx2” (small x 2).
When the single surround back speaker is
small
Select “SMLx1” (small x 1).
When you do not use the surround back
speakers
Select “NONE” (none). The surround back channel
signals are directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
LFE Bass out LFE/BASS OUT
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH
When a subwoofer is connected to this unit
and you want to get natural bass sound
Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well
as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to
“SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.
When a subwoofer is connected to this unit
and you want to get rich bass sound
Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of
any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE
signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to
the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front
left and right channels are directed to the front left and
right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the
“FRONT SP” setting (see page 59).
When you do not use a subwoofer
Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the low-
frequency signals of the front left and right channels,
and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to
“SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left
and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP”
setting (see page 59).
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
SUR. L/R SP
NONE >SML LRG
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
SUR.B L/R SP
NONE SMLx1 >SMLx2
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
LFE/BASS OUT
SWFR FRNT>BOTH
61 En
SET MENU
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Crossover CROSS OVER
Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) in “SPEAKER
SET” (see page 59). All frequencies below the selected
frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or front speakers
depending on the setting of “LFE/BASS OUT” in
“SPEAKER SET” (see page 59).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE
• Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the
phase of your subwoofer.
• Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL
Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each
speaker.
Control range: –10 to +10 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting
of the speakers.
• Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SUR.B” is displayed if “SUR.B
L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 60).
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
CROSSOVER
FREQ;;;80Hz
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
SUBWOOFER PHASE
>NORMAL REVERSE
SP LEVEL Adjusted speaker
FR.L
Front left speaker
FR.R
Front right speaker
CNTR
Center speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
SUR.L
Surround left speaker
SUR.R
Surround right speaker
SBL
Surround back left speaker
SBR
Surround back right speaker
Notes
1 SOUND MENU
B)SP LEVEL 1/2
-
__________
+
. FR.L
FR.R
CNTR
SWFR
1 SOUND MENU
B)SP LEVEL 2/2
-
__________
+
.SUR.L
SUR.R
SBL
SBR
62 En
SET MENU
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)
[Other models]: meters (m)
• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.
• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
Initial setting:
FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft)
SUR. L/SUR. R/SB L/SB R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting
of the speakers.
• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SUR.B” is displayed if
“SUR.B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see
page 60).
■ Center speaker equalizer D)CENTER GEQ
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band
(100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic
equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of
the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You
can make adjustments while listening to the currently
selected source component or a test tone.
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
Test tone
TEST
Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ”
while listening to a test tone.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently
selected source component.
• Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and
front left speakers.
■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective when the input
signal contains the LFE channel.
Control range: –20 to 0 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Speaker
SPEAKER
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
Headphone HEADPHONE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 60),
some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT
jack.
SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
SUR. L
Surround left speaker
SUR. R
Surround right speaker
SB L
Surround back left speaker
SB R
Surround back right speaker
Notes
1 SOUND MENU
C)SP DISTANCE 1/2
. UNIT;;;;;;meters
FRONT L;;;;3.00m
FRONT R;;;;3.00m
CENTER;;;;;2.60m
SWFR;;;;;;;3.00m
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
p
p
p
[
1 SOUND MENU
C)SP DISTANCE 2/2
. SUR. L;;;;;2.40m
SUR. R;;;;;2.40m
SB L;;;;;;;2.40m
SB R;;;;;;;2.40m
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
p
p
p
[
Note
1 SOUND MENU
D)CENTER GEQ
TEST >OFF ON
. 100Hz ;;;;;; 0dB
300Hz ;;;;;; 0dB
1kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
3kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
10kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
E)LFE LEVEL
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
1 SOUND MENU
63 En
SET MENU
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
Speaker
SPEAKER
Adjusts the speaker compression.
Headphone HEADPHONE
Adjusts the headphone compression.
Choices: MIN, STD, MAX
• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low
volume levels.
• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.
• Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest
amount of dynamic range.
■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this
unit.
Mute type MUTE TYPE
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (see page 37).
Choices: FULL, –20dB
• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio
output.
• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio delay A.DELAY
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize
it with the video image. This may be necessary when
using certain LCD monitors or projectors.
Control range: 0 to 160 ms
Control step: 1 ms
Maximum volume MAX VOL.
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level. This
feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by
mistake. For example, the original volume range is –80 dB
to +16 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –5 dB,
the volume range becomes –80 dB to –5 dB.
Control range: –30 dB to +10 dB, +16 dB
Control step: 5 dB
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT.VOL.”
setting. For example, if “INIT.VOL.” is set to –20 dB and “MAX
VOL.” is set to –30 dB, the volume level is automatically set to
–30 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time.
Initial volume INIT.VOL.
Use this feature to set the volume level when the power of
this unit is turned on.
Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80 dB to +16 dB
Control step: 1 dB
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT.VOL.”
setting.
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
. SPEAKER;;;;;;MAX
HEADPHONE;;;;MAX
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
1 SOUND MENU
G)AUDIO SET
. MUTE TYPE;;;FULL
A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms
MAX VOL.;;;+16dB
INIT.VOL.;;;;OFF
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Select
1 SOUND MENU
Note
Note
64 En
SET MENU
■ HDMI set H)HDMI SET
Use this feature to select the component to play back
HDMI audio signals.
Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO
Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI
audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component
connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this
unit.
• This unit transmits audio and video signals input at the HDMI
input jacks to the HDMI out jack only when this unit is turned
on even if “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “Other”.
• Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the
connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of
each connected component.
■ Extended surround I)EXTD SUR.
Extended decoder select mode
Use this feature to designate the extended decoder mode
for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT
jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect the digital audio input signal and activate the
appropriate decoder.
• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last decoder mode set for “EXTD SUR.”.
Extended decoder specifying
Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for
multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx,
Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders by using the
connected surround back speakers.
Choice Functions
RX-V563
Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The
HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI input
jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI
component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on
the rear panel of this unit.
Other
Plays back HDMI audio signals on another
HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT
jack.
Notes
H)HDMI SET
SUPPORT AUDIO:
RX-V563
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
[ENTER]:Return
1 SOUND MENU
Choice Functions
AUTO
Activates the optimum decoder to play back
signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit
recognizes a signal flag being input.
PLIIxMovie
(when 2 surround
back speakers are
used.)
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in
7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie
decoder.
PLIIxMusic
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in
6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx
music decoder.
EX/ES
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in
6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX
or DTS-ES decoder.
OFF
Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1
channels.
I)EXTD SUR.
. >AUTO LAST
EXTD SUR.;;;;;;AUTO
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
[ENTER]:Return
1 SOUND MENU
65 En
SET MENU
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the
decoder mode or rename the input source.
■ Input and output assignment
A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT
Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the
component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do
not correspond to your needs. Change the following
parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively
connect more components.
Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component by using RINPUT l / h (or
the input selector buttons (3)).
For COAXIAL INPUT jack 1
COAXIAL IN (1)
Choices: (1) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, DVR
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 and 3
OPTICAL IN (2)
OPTICAL IN (3)
Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, DVR
(3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, DVR
You cannot select a specific item more than once.
For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 4
OPTICAL OUT (4)
Choices: (4) MD/CD-R, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
For HDMI jacks 1 and 2
HDMI IN [1]
HDMI IN [2]
Choices: [1] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
[2] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
2 INPUT MENU
Note
;MANUAL SETUP
2 INPUT MENU
. A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
B)INPUT RENAME
C)VOLUME TRIM
D)DECODER MODE
E)MULTI CH SET
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ENTER]:Enter
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
COAXIAL IN
. (1);;;;; DVD
( DVD )
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Select
2 INPUT MENU
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
OPTICAL IN
. (2);;;;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL )
(3);;;;; CD
(CD)
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Select
2 INPUT MENU
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
OPTICAL OUT
. (4);;;;;MD/CD-R
(MD/CD-R )
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Select
2 INPUT MENU
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
HDMI IN
. [IN1];;; DVD
( DVD )
[IN2];;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL )
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Select
2 INPUT MENU
66 En
SET MENU
■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.
1 Press one of the input selector buttons (
3
)
or
D
MULTI CH IN to select the input
source you want to change the name of.
2 Press
4
AMP and then press
7
l / h on the
remote control to place the “_” (underscore)
under the space or the character you want to
edit.
3 Press
7
k / n to select the character you
want to use and then press
7
l / h to move
to the next space.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
•Press
7
n to change the character in the following order,
or press
7
k to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#,
*, –, +, etc.)
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each
input source.
5 Press
7
ENTER to exit from “INPUT
RENAME”.
■ Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the output volume of each
source. This is useful if you want to balance the level of
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume
when switching between input sources.
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD,
DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, DOCK, USB,
MULTI CH
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
You can only adjust the value for DOCK when your iPod is
stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit.
■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE
Decoder select mode
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for
the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks
when you turn on the power of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signals and select the
appropriate decoder mode.
• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last decoder mode used the connected input
source.
DTS decoder prioritize setting
Choices: AUTO, DTS
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
input mode.
• Select “DTS” when you play back a DTS-CD.
Notes
B)INPUT RENAME
DVD -> DVD
[ ]/[ ]:Position
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Chara.
p
p
2 INPUT MENU
MULTI CH IN
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
USB
or
Note
C)VOLUME TRIM
DVD
DVD ;;;;;0.0dB
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
p
[
[RETURN]:Exit
2 INPUT MENU
D)DECODER MODE
. >AUTO LAST
CD ;;;;AUTO
DVD ;;;;AUTO
DTV/CBL ;;;;AUTO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
2 INPUT MENU
67 En
SET MENU
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Multi channel input setup
E)MULTI CH SET
Background Video BGV
Use this feature to select the video source played in the
background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks.
Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, LAST
y
Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last
selected video source as the background video source.
Input channels INPUT CH
Use this setting to select the number of channels input
from an external decoder (see page 19).
Choices: 6CH, 8CH
If the connected component outputs discrete
6-channel audio signals.
Select “6CH”.
If the connected component outputs discrete
8-channel audio signals.
Select “8CH”. Also set “FRONT” (see below) to the
analog audio jacks at which the front left and right
channel signals output from the connected component
are input.
Front left and right channels input jack FRONT
If you selected “8CH” in “INPUT CH”, you can select the
analog audio jacks at which the front left and right channel
signals output from the connected external decoder is
input.
Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, V-AUX
“FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to
“8CH”.
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: –4 to 0
Control step: 1
• Press
7
l to make the front panel display dimmer.
• Press
7
h to make the front panel display brighter.
Video conversion VIDEO CONV.
Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals
input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” to convert composite and S-video signals
interchangeably, or to convert composite and S-video
to component video signals.
• Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line
video signals interchangeably.
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the
same type of video connections between each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
converted to component video signals, the picture quality may
suffer depending on your VCR.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.
• When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a
game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals
even if you set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.
Note
E)MULTI CH SET
BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST
INPUT CH;;;;;6CH
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
2 INPUT MENU
E)MULTI CH SET
BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST
INPUT CH;;;;;8CH
FRONT;;;;;;;;DVD
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
2 INPUT MENU
3 OPTION MENU
Notes
;MANUAL SETUP
3 OPTION MENU 1/2
E)BLUETOOTH SET
p
p
. A)DISPLAY SET
B)MEMORY GUARD
C)AUDIO SELECT
D)PARAM. INI
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
;MANUAL SETUP
3 OPTION MENU 2/2
p
p
. F)USB PLAY STYLE
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
A)DISPLAY SET 1/2
. DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0
VIDEO CONV;;;;ON
FL SCROLL;;;CONT
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Select
3 OPTION MENU
A)DISPLAY SET 2/2
. OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0
OSD-SOURCE;;;30s
OSD-AMP;;;;;;30s
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Select
3 OPTION MENU
68 En
SET MENU
Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL
Use this feature to set whether to display the information
(such as a song title or a channel name) in the front panel
display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once
when “DOCK” is selected as the input source.
Choices: CONT, ONCE
• Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the
front panel display in a continuous manner.
• Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric
characters after scrolling all characters once.
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Control range: –5 (dowmward) to +5 (upward)
Control step: 1
Initial setting: 0
• Press
7
l to lower the position of the OSD.
• Press
7
h to raise the position of the OSD.
Source feature OSD display time
OSD-SOURCE
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
iPod menu in the OSD after you perform a certain
operation.
Choices: ON, 10s, 30s
• Select “ON” to display the OSD unceasingly during an
operation.
• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
• Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
Amplifier function OSD display time
OSD-AMP
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
status after you perform a certain operation.
Choices: ON, 10s, 30s
• Select “ON” to display the OSD constantly during an
operation.
• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
• Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”
feature.
• Select “ON” to protect:
– sound field program parameters
– all “SET MENU” items
– all speaker levels
– SCENE template parameters
When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select
and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.
■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack
select setting for the input sources when you turn on the
power of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signals and select the
appropriate input mode.
• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last input mode used for the connected input
source (see page 36).
Note
B)MEMORY GUARD
>OFF ON
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
3 OPTION MENU
C)AUDIO SELECT
>AUTO LAST
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
3 OPTION MENU
69 En
SET MENU
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to set all the parameters of the sound field
programs to the initial factory settings.
Choices: NO, YES
• Select “NO” to cancel the parameter initialization and
return to the previous menu screen.
• Select “YES” and press
7
ENTER to set all the sound
field parameters to the initial factory settings.
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize the sound field program parameters.
• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when
“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”.
■ Bluetooth setting E)BLUETOOTH SET
Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha
Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with
your Bluetooth component. For details about the pairing,
refer to “Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your
Bluetooth™ component” on page 55.
1
7
ENTER to start pairing.
The connected Bluetooth adapter starts searching
Bluetooth components. “Searching...” appears in the
video monitor.
2 Check that the Bluetooth component detects
the Bluetooth adapter.
If the Bluetooth component the Bluetooth adapter,
“YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the
Bluetooth device list.
3 Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth
device list and then enter the pass key
“0000” on the Bluetooth component.
Once this unit completes the pairing successfully,
“Pairing completed” appears.
y
To cancel the pairing, press
8
RETURN to exit from
“START PAIRING”.
4 Press
8
RETURN to exit from “START
PAIRING”.
• If the connected Bluetooth adapter cannot find any Bluetooth
components, “Not found” appears.
• If a Bluetooth adapter is not connected to this unit, “No BT
adapter” appears.
Notes
D)PARAM. INI
>NO YES
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
p
[
3 OPTION MENU
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for
the pairing operation. You are recommended to read
and fully understand all the instructions before starting.
Notes
3 OPTION MENU
E)BLUETOOTH SET
. START PAIRING
[ENTER]:Enter
70 En
SET MENU
■ USB playback styles F)USB PLAY STYLE
Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to
your preference. You can shuffle files in a random order or
repeat one specific file or a sequence of files.
Repeat REPEAT
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one file or a
sequence of files.
Choices: OFF, SINGLE, ALL
• Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “SINGLE” to set this unit to repeat one file.
• Select “ALL” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
files.
Shuffle SHUFFLE
Use this feature to set this unit to play files or folders in a
random order.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “ON” to set this unit to play files or folders in a
random order.
F)USB PLAY STYLE
. REPEAT.......OFF
SHUFFLE......OFF
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
3 OPTION MENU
p
p
Remote control features
71 En
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (see page 73).
■ Controlling this unit
Press
4
AMP to control this unit.
*1
These buttons always control this unit.
*2
These buttons control this unit only when
4
AMP is pressed.
■ Controlling a TV
Press
3
DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your
TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for
DTV/CBL (see page 73).
*1
These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether
you press
3
DTV/CBL or not.
*2
These buttons control your TV only when
3
DTV/CBL is
pressed. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on
page 72.
y
You can control more than one TV by setting the appropriate
remote control code for any input source selector buttons other
than
3
DTV/CBL. In such a case, you can control the buttons
highlighted above (*1 and *2) when you press the input source
selector button.
Remote control features
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
Notes
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT DIRECT
PARAMETER
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
C D
AB
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
AVTV
SCENE
4321
USB
MENU
RETURN
MEMORY
FREQ/TEXT EON
MODE - PTY SEEK - START
AMP
*2
*1
Notes
Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER
Turns on or off the power.
TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.
TV VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV INPUT
Changes the input source.
TV MUTE
Mutes the audio output.
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l
PROG
h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
AVTV
SCENE
4321
USB
DIRECT
PARAMETER
C D
AB
MENU
RETURN
MEMORY
FREQ/TEXT EON
MODE - PTY SEEK - START
DTV/CBL
*2
*1
72 En
Remote control features
■ Controlling other components
Press one of the input selector buttons (3) or A to D
buttons to control other components. You must set the
appropriate remote control code for each input source in
advance (see page 73). The following table shows the
function of each control button used to control other
components assigned to each input selector button. Be
advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the
selected component.
y
• The remote control has 13 modes (input areas) to control
components so that the remote control can operate up to 13
different components.
• When you press one of the optional component control area
buttons (A to D), you can control the desired component
without changing the input source of this unit.
*1
This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 73).
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
C D
AB
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
AVTV
SCENE
4321
USB
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT DIRECT
PARAMETER
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l
PROG
h
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
MEMORY
FREQ/TEXT EON
MODE - PTY SEEK - START
[2]
[8]
[9]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[1]
Remote control
DVD player/
recorder
VCR
Digital TV/
Cable TV
LD player CD player
MD/CD
recorder
Tuner
[1] AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1
[2] TITLE Title Band
[3] PRESET/CH k
Up VCR channel up Up
Preset up (1-8)/
Tuning up
PRESET/CH n Down
VCR channel
down
Down
Preset down
(1-8)/Tuning
down
A/B/C/D/E l Left Left
Preset down
(A-E)
A/B/C/D/E h Right Right
Preset up
(A-E)
ENTER Enter Enter Hold
[4] RETURN Return Return Memory
[5] REC Disc skip
(player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec Rec *2 Disc skip Rec
p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play
w
Search
backward
Search backward
Search backward
*2
Search backward Search backward Search backward Information
f Search forward Search forward
Search forward
*2
Search forward Search forward Search forward
e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause
b Skip backward Skip backward
Skip backward
*2
Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward
Audio program
down
a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward
Audio program
up
s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop
[6] 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons
Preset stations
(1-8)
[7] MENU Menu Menu Search mode
[8] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Display
[9] ENT Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index Enter
Notes
73 En
Remote control features
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote
control codes” at the end of this manual.
Remote control code default settings
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a
Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case,
try setting another Yamaha remote control code.
1 While pressing and holding one of the input
selector buttons (
3
) on the remote control to
select the input area you want to set up,
press
2
AV POWER for more than 3
seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (
F
) to
enter the four-digit remote control code for
the component to be used.
When the setting succeeds, “RemoteSetup OK”
appears; however, when it does not, “RemoteSetup
NG” appears in the front panel display.
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,
try each of them until you find the correct one.
• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the
setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup
procedure.
Setting remote control codes
Input
source
Component
category
Manufacturer
Default
code
CD CD Yamaha 5013
MD/CD-R CD-R Yamaha 5001
TUNER TUNER Yamaha 5007
DVD DVD Yamaha 2000
DTV/CBL — — —
V-AUX TUNER Yamaha 5011
DVR DVR Yamaha 2011
USB TUNER Yamaha 5012
A TUNER Yamaha 5009
B TUNER Yamaha 5017
C TUNER Yamaha 5009
D TUNER Yamaha 5017
Note
Notes
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
C D
AB
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
USB
POWER
AV
While holding down
Press for 3
seconds
Using multi-zone configuration
74 En
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce
separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone
using the supplied remote control.
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the
infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone.
• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.
y
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with
your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements.
• Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to
use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below.
■ Using the external amplifier
Connect the amplifier/receiver in the second zone and other components to this unit as follows.
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
Using multi-zone configuration
Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be
connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connecting Zone 2
Note
OUTOUT
IN
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
OUT
IN
REMOTE
REMOTE
This unit
Yamaha
component
Yamaha
component
Infrared signal
receiver
Infrared signal emitter
DVD player
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal receiver
Second zone
(Zone 2)
Main zone
This unit
From the ZONE 2 OUT jacks
From the REMOTE OUT jacks
From the REMOTE IN jacks
75 En
Using multi-zone configuration
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control
buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The
available operations are as follows:
• Selecting the input source of Zone 2.
• Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as
the input source of Zone 2 (see page 45).
• Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this
unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source
(see page 53).
• Enjoying music stored on your Bluetooth component
being performed “paring” operation with a Yamaha
Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10 sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit when “V-
AUX” is selected as the input source
(see page 55).
You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is
flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is
automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal
operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection
procedure.
■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel
Turning on Zone 2
Press
K
ZONE CONTROL to turn on Zone 2.
Activating the Zone 2 operation mode
Press
K
ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2.
The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for
approximately 10 seconds.
Controlling Zone 2
Note
ZONE2
Flashes
76 En
Using multi-zone configuration
Operating Zone 2
Press RINPUT l / h to select the desired input
source while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in
the front panel display.
• Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the TUNER
features in Zone 2. For details about the TUNER
operations, see “FM/AM tuning” on page 45.
• Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use iPod
features in Zone 2. For details about the iPod
operations, see “Using iPod™” on page 53.
• Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use Bluetooth
component features in Zone 2. For details about the
Bluetooth component operations, see “Using
Bluetooth™ components” on page 55.
Set Zone 2 to the standby mode
Press
B
ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the
standby mode.
y
Press CSYSTEM OFF to set the main zone and Zone 2 to the
standby mode simultaneously.
■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote
control
Turning on Zone 2
While pressing and holding
4
AMP, press
G
POWER.
Operating Zone 2
While pressing and holding
4
AMP, press one of
the input selector buttons (
3
) to select the
desired input source of Zone 2.
Setting Zone 2 to the standby mode
While pressing and holding
4
AMP, press
H
STANDBY to set ZONE 2 to the standby
mode.
Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2
operation mode.
POWER
AMP
While holding
down
Advanced setup
77 En
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the
front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers
additional operations to adjust and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold
under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your
listening environment.
• Only
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF,
O
PROGRAM
l / h, and
P
STRAIGHT are effective while you are using the advanced
setup menu.
• No other operations can be made while you are using the
advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel
display.
1 Press
C
SYSTEM OFF to set this unit to the
standby mode.
2 Press and hold
N
TONE CONTROL and
then press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn
on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Press
O
PROGRAM
l / h to select the
parameter you want to adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
4 Press PSTRAIGHT repeatedly to change
the selected parameter setting.
5 Press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to confirm
your selection and set this unit to the
standby mode.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
■ Bi-amplifier setting BI-AMP
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier
function (see page 12).
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-amplifier
function. “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE”
automatically, and this unit outputs the front channel
audio signals at the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
speaker terminals.
• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-amplifier
function.
■ SCENE IR code setting SCENE IR
Use this feature to output the remote control signals at the
REMOTE OUT jack automatically when this unit is in the
SCENE mode.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” when the component connected to the
REMOTE OUT jack is the Yamaha component and has
the capability of the SCENE control signals. This unit
automatically sends the remote control signals to the
component.
• Select “OFF” when the component connected to the
REMOTE OUT jack is not the Yamaha component and
does not have the capability of the SCENE control
signals.
If noises are output when you operate the SCENE function, set
“SCENE IR” to “OFF”.
■ Tuner frequency step TU
(Asia and General models only)
Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according
to the frequency spacing in your area.
Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50
• Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South
America.
• Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.
■ Initializing INIT.
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings (see page 87).
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this
unit.
• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the
advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
Advanced setup
Notes
Note
Notes
Troubleshooting
78 En
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
■ General
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
11
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then
use it normally.
—
No sound. Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
13-19
No appropriate Audio input jack select has
been set.
Set an appropriate Audio input jack select.
36
Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,
“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
36
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG” while playing a source
encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or
“COAX/OPT”.
36
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with R INPUT
l / h (or the input selector buttons(3)).
35
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
11
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers with MSPEAKERS.
35
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted.
Press IMUTE or
L
VOLUME +/– to resume audio
output and then adjust the volume.
37
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
—
The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
14
“SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “Other” and
“HDMI” audio signals are not being
played back on this unit.
Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “RX-V563” in
“MANUAL SETUP”.
64
79 En
Troubleshooting
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted.
Press IMUTE or
L
VOLUME +/– to resume audio
output.
37
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
11-19
Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings.
43
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
This is not malfunction.
—
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“CENTER SP” in “SPEAKER SET” is set
to “NONE”.
Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
59
One of the sound field programs (except
for 7ch Stereo) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
40
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SPEAKER SET” is
set to “NONE”.
Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
60
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press
B
STRAIGHT so that “STRAIGHT”
disappears from the front panel display.
41
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SPEAKER SET” is
set to “NONE” and “SUR.B L/R SP” is
automatically set to “NONE”.
Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR. B L/R SP” to a setting
other than “NONE”.
60
“SUR.B L/R SP” in “SPEAKER SET” is
set to “NONE”.
Set “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”.
60
No sound from the
center, surround or
surround back
speakers when the
FRONT B speakers
are activated.
“FRONT B” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to
“ZONE B”.
Set “FRONT B” to “FRONT”.
59
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET”
is set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
60
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET”
is set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-
channel source is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
60
The source does not contain low-
frequency bass signals.
This is not malfunction.
—
80 En
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG”.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
36
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
You are attempting to set the volume level
higher than the maximum volume level.
Adjust “MAX VOL.” setting.
63
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned
off.
Turn on the power of the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
This is not malfunction.
—
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT (REC)
jacks.
The source component is not connected to
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
15, 19
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION
MENU” is set to “ON”.
Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
68
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
No sound is heard
from the connected
HDMI component.
The HDMI component does not accept the
multi-channel audio signals.
Convert the multi-channel audio signals to the 2-
channel audio signals at the source component such
as a DVD player.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
11
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This in not malfunction.
—
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature is too high and
the overheat protection circuitry has been
activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
The video conversion
function does not
work.
Some digital signals are input via HDMI
jack.
Turn off the power of the component connected to
HDMI IN jacks.
15
81 En
Troubleshooting
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Tuner
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
21
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
45
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
45
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Set preset stations.
46
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
45
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noise can result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
82 En
Troubleshooting
■ AUTO SETUP
Before AUTO SETUP
During AUTO SETUP
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
Connect MIC!
Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
26
Unplug HP!
Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones.
—
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
E-1:NO FRONT SP
Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections.
11
E-2:NO SUR.SP
A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections.
11
E-3:SBR->SBL
Only a right surround back channel signal is
detected.
Connect the surround back speaker to the
LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS
terminal if you only have one surround
back speaker.
11
E-4:NOISY
Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet
environment.
—
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the
optimizer microphone.
—
E-5:CHECK SUR.
Surround back speakers are connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
Connect surround speakers when you use
surround back speakers.
11
E-6:NO MIC
The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
26
E-7:NO SIGNAL
The optimizer microphone does not detect
test tones.
Check the microphone setting.
26
Check the speaker connections and
placement.
10, 11,
26
E-8:USER CANCEL
The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was
cancelled due to user activity.
Run “AUTO SETUP” again.
26
E-9:INTERNAL ERROR
An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again.
26
83 En
Troubleshooting
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
After AUTO SETUP
• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again.
• If a warning message “W-1”, “W-2”, or “W-3” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.
• If an error message “E-9” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified Yamaha service center.
Warning message Cause Remedy
See
page
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
Speaker polarity is not correct. This
message may appear depending on the
speakers even when the speakers are
connected correctly.
Check the speaker connections for proper
polarity (+ or –).
12
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft)
The distance between the nearest speaker
and the furthest speaker is out of adjustable
range.
Bring the speaker closer to the listening
position.
—
W-3:LEVEL ERROR
The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive. (No level correction
is made.)
If “SWFR:TOO LOUD” or “SWFR:TOO
LOW” appears, adjust the output volume of
the subwoofer.
26, 61
Readjust the speaker installation so that all
speakers are set in locations with similar
conditions.
—
Check the speaker connections.
11
Use speakers of similar quality.
—
Notes
84 En
Troubleshooting
■ USB
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The music files and
directories in the USB
device cannot be
viewed.
The music files and directories are placed
in locations other than the FAT area.
Place music files and directories in the FAT area.
—
You are attempting to browse directory
hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory
with more than 500 files.
Modify the data structure on your USB device.
—
The USB device
cannot be recognized.
The connected USB device is other than a
USB mass storage class USB memory
device or USB portable audio player.
This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage
class USB memory device (except USB hard disk
drives) or USB portable audio player. Also note that it
cannot recognize certain USB devices even when they
are devices as described above.
51
Some devices may become easier to recognize when
they are inserted before turning this unit on.
23
“Disconnected” is
displayed even when
a USB device is
present.
This unit recognized the USB device as an
illegal device.
Turn this unit off then on again.
23
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Disconnected
Your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player has been
disconnected from the USB port of this
unit.
Check the connection between this unit and your
USB memory device or USB portable audio player.
—
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory
device or USB portable audio player to the USB port
of this unit.
51
Try resetting your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player.
—
Access error
This unit cannot access your USB
memory device or USB portable audio
player.
Try another USB memory device or USB portable
audio player.
—
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory
device or USB portable audio player to the USB port
of this unit.
51
Try resetting your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player.
—
Unable to play
No varied data is detected. Try another USB memory device or USB portable
audio player.
—
85 En
Troubleshooting
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ iPod
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod
(see page 20).
Note
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Loading...
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring
song lists from your iPod.
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
20
Try resetting your iPod.
—
Unknown iPod
The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod
mini are supported.
—
iPod connected
Your iPod is properly stationed in a
Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-10,
sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit, and the connection
between your iPod and this unit is
complete.
Disconnected
Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha
iPod universal dock (YDS-10, sold
separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit.
20
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod
are playable.
—
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
—
86 En
Troubleshooting
■ Bluetooth
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Searching...
The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth
component is in the middle of the pairing.
The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth
component is in the middle of establishing
the connection.
Completed
The paring is completed.
Not found
The Bluetooth adapter cannot find the
Bluetooth component.
Canceled
The paring is canceled.
BT connected
The connection between the Yamaha
Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold
separately) and the Bluetooth component
is established.
Disconnected
The Bluetooth component is disconnected
from the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such
as YBA-10, sold separately).
No BT adapter
The Bluetooth adapter is not connected to
the DOCK terminal.
Connect the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as
YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal.
20
87 En
Troubleshooting
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Remote control
■ Resetting the system
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings.
1 Press
C
SYSTEM OFF on the front panel to
set this unit to the standby mode.
2 Press and hold
N
TONE CONTROL and
then press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn
on this unit.
The advanced setup menu appears in the front panel
display.
3 Press
O
PROGRAM l / h to select “INIT.”.
4 Press
P
STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“RESET”.
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization
procedure without making any changes.
5 Press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to confirm
your selection and set this unit to the
standby mode.
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the
advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making
any changes, press
P
STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“CANCEL” and then press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF.
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
25
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
3
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “List of
remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
73
Try setting another code for the same manufacturer
using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this
manual.
73
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Notes
Glossary
88 En
■ Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a
speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section
of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the
combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement
each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range.
This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much
simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence
the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the
speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high
pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes
frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above
the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes
frequencies above its cutoff.
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original sound
field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby
Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual
experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your
own home.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB
and P
R signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to
output component signals.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with
“fly-over” and “fly-around” effects.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”
for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for
2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game
sources.
Glossary
89 En
Glossary
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects
and directionality.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/
24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-
motion video for music programs and motion picture
soundtracks on DVD video.
■ DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a
home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of
sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital
surround in your home. This system produces practically
distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front left
and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1
(subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit
incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel
reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the
existing 5.1-channel format.
■ HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video
interface. Providing an interface between any source (such
as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video
monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports
standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as
multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI
transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-
channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure
audio/video interface that meets the security requirements
of content providers and system operators. For further
information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low-frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ MP3
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It
employs the irreversible compression method, which
achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data
of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be
capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11
(128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to
music CD.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There
are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources
and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
90 En
Glossary
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,
while the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the
sound level can be reproduced.
■ SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field so that
accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm
that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects
even without any surround speakers by using virtual
surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual
CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that
does not include a center speaker.
■ WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the
method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. It does not specify the
compression (coding) method so a desired compression
method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible
with the PCM method (no compression) and some
compression methods including the ADPCM method.
■ WMA
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft
Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression
method, which achieves a high compression rate by
thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human
ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data
quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a
similar audio quality to music CD.
Specifications
91 En
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround Back
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω ...................................................... 90 W
[Other models]
1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω ...................................................... 90 W
• Maximum Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back
(JEITA)
[Asia, General, China, and Korea models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ..................................................... 115 W
• Dynamic Power
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
(IHF, 8/6/4/2 Ω) ............................................ 90/110/130/150 W
[Other models]
(IHF, 6/4/2 Ω) .................................................... 100/110/125 W
• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 Ω .................................................................................... 0.18 dB
• Maximum Input Signal
CD, etc. Effect On, 1 kHz, 0.5% THD ................... 2.0 V or more
• Frequency Response
CD, etc. to Front L/R ............................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
(1 kHz, 50 W, Front L/R, 8 Ω ) ............................. 0.06% or less
[Other models]
(1 kHz, 50 W, Front L/R, 6 Ω ) ............................. 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD (200 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................... 98 dB or more
CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shorted) to Front L/R
................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance .............. 400 mV/470 Ω
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Output Level/Output Impedance
AUDIO OUT (REC) ............................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT ............................................ 4 V/1.2 kΩ
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F.
(FRONT SP, CENTER SP, SUR. L/R SP, SUR. B L/R SP:
SMALL/SML) ............................................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type (Gray back)
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] .................... NTSC
[Other models] ....................................................................... PAL
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) ......................... NTSC/PAL
• Signal Level
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more
• Maximum Input Level........................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component Signal .................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)
Mono ................................................................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.5%/0.5%
• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz
[Europe and Russia models] .............................. 230 V AC, 50 Hz
[Australia model] .............................................. 240 V AC, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ................................................... 220 V AC, 60 Hz
[China model] .................................................... 220 V AC, 50 Hz
[Asia model]
...................................................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[General model]
....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 240 W/320 VA
[General model] ................................................................. 260 W
[Other models] ................................................................... 240 W
• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.8 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models only]
7ch, 10% THD ................................................................... 490 W
•AC Outlets
[Australia model] ....................................... 1 (100 W maximum)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...............2 (Total 100 W maximum)
[Asia, General, China, Europe and Russia models]
............................................................2 (Total 50 W maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 151 x 352 mm
(17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 13-7/8”)
• Weight ............................................................. 9.0 kg (19 lbs 13 oz)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
INDEX
92 En
■ Numerics
1 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........ 57
2 INPUT MENU, Manual setup .......... 57
2ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 40
2ch Stereo, Sound field program ......... 40
3 OPTION MENU ............................... 67
3 OPTION MENU, Manual setup ....... 58
7ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 40
7ch Stereo, Sound field program ......... 40
96/24 indicator ..................................... 24
■ A
A)DISPLAY SET, Option menu ......... 67
A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT,
Input menu ....................................... 65
A)SPEAKER SET, Sound menu ......... 59
A.DELAY, Audio settings ................... 63
AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) .......... 22
AFFAIRS, Radio Data System
program type .................................... 49
AM antenna connection ....................... 21
AM tuning ............................................ 45
Amplifier function OSD display time,
Display settings ............................... 68
Audio components, Connection ........... 19
Audio delay, Audio settings ................. 63
Audio information ................................ 38
Audio input jacks selection .................. 36
AUDIO jacks ....................................... 13
Audio jacks .......................................... 13
AUDIO SELECT ................................. 36
Audio select, Option menu .................. 68
Audio settings, Sound menu ................ 63
Audio signal flow ................................. 15
AUTO SETUP ..................................... 26
AUTO SETUP, Error message ............ 82
Automatic preset tuning,
FM/AM tuning ................................. 46
Automatic tuning, FM/AM tuning ....... 45
■ B
B)INPUT RENAME, Input menu ....... 66
B)MEMORY GUARD,
Option menu .................................... 68
B)SPEAKER LEVEL, Sound menu
....... 61
Background Video,
Multi channel input setup ................ 67
BGV, Multi channel input setup .......... 67
BI-AMP, Advanced setup .................... 77
Bi-Amplifier, Advanced setup ............. 77
Bluetooth setting, Option menu ........... 69
■ C
C)AUDIO SELECT, Option menu ...... 68
C)SP DISTANCE, Sound menu .......... 62
C)VOLUME TRIM, Input menu ......... 66
CD player, Connection ........................ 19
CD recorder, Connection ..................... 19
CENTER SP, Speaker settings ............ 59
Center speaker equalizer,
Sound menu .....................................62
Center speaker, Speaker settings ..........59
Center width, Sound field parameter
......42
CINEMA DSP indicator ......................25
CLASSICS, Radio Data System
program type ....................................49
Clock time, Radio Data System
information .......................................48
COAXIAL IN (1), Input assignment
......65
COAXIAL INPUT assignment,
Input assignment ..............................65
COAXIAL INPUT jacks ......................65
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..............13
Connect error, iPod controlling status
message ............................................85
Connect MIC!,
Auto setup error message .................82
Connecting to the
FRONT A terminals .........................12
Connection, AM antenna connection
......21
Connection, Audio components ...........19
Connection, CD player .........................19
Connection, CD recorder .....................19
Connection, DVD player ......................17
Connection, DVD recorder ..................18
Connection, external decoder ...............19
Connection, FM antenna ......................21
Connection, HDMI ...............................14
Connection, MD recorder ....................19
Connection, Multi-format player .........19
Connection, Power cable ......................22
Connection, PVR .................................18
Connection, set-top boxes ....................18
Connection, VCR .................................18
Connection, Video components ...........16
Connection,
Yamaha iPod universal dock ...........20
Controlling a TV ..................................71
Controlling other components,
Remote control .................................72
Controlling this unit,
Remote control .................................71
Creating original SCENE templates ....33
CROSSOVER, Speaker settings ..........61
Crossover, Speaker settings .................61
CT indicator .........................................25
CT WIDTH, Sound field parameter .....42
CT, Radio Data System information
.......48
CULTURE, Radio Data System
program type ....................................49
Current status display ...........................37
■ D
D)CENTER GEQ, Sound menu ...........62
D)DECODER MODE, Input menu .....66
D)PARAM. INI, Option menu .............69
Decoder indicators ...............................24
Decoder mode, Input menu ..................66
Decoder select mode,
Decoder mode ................................. 66
DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks
...... 13
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks .... 13
DIMENSION, Sound field parameter
.... 42
Dimension, Sound field parameter ...... 42
DIMMER, Display settings ................. 67
Dimmer, Display settings .................... 67
DIRECT ............................................... 43
Disconnected, iPod controlling status
message ........................................... 85
Display settings, Option menu ............ 67
DIST .................................................... 28
DIST, Auto setup result ....................... 28
DISTANCE ......................................... 27
DISTANCE, Auto setup ...................... 27
DOCK indicator .................................. 24
DRAMA, Radio Data System
program type ................................... 49
DSP LEVEL, Sound field parameter
..... 42
DSP level, Sound field parameter ....... 42
DTS decoder prioritize setting,
Decoder mode ................................. 66
DVD player connection ....................... 17
DVD recorder connection ................... 18
Dynamic range, Sound menu .............. 63
■ E
E)BLUETOOTH SET,
Option menu .................................... 69
E)EXTD SUR., Sound menu ............... 64
E)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu .............. 62
E)MULTI CH SET, Input menu .......... 67
E-1:NO FRONT SP,
Auto setup error message ................ 82
E-2:NO SURR.SP,
Auto setup error message ................ 82
E-3:SBR->SBL,
Auto setup error message ................ 82
E-4:NOISY,
Auto setup error message ................ 82
E-5:CHECK SUR., Auto setup error
message ........................................... 82
E-6:NO MIC,
Auto setup error message ................ 82
E-7:NO SIGNAL,
Auto setup error message ................ 82
E-8:USER CANCEL,
Auto setup error message ................ 82
E-9:INTERNAL ERROR,
Auto setup error message ................ 82
EDUCATE, Radio Data System
program type ................................... 49
Effect level, Sound field parameter ..... 42
Enhanced other networks data service,
Radio Data System tuning ............... 50
ENHANCER indicator ........................ 24
EON data service,
Radio Data System tuning ............... 50
EON indicator ...................................... 25
Index
Index
93 En
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Exchange, Preset station,
FM/AM tuning ................................. 47
Extended surround, Sound menu ......... 64
External decoder connection ................ 19
■ F
F)DYNAMIC RANGE,
Sound menu .....................................63
Factory presets, Advanced setup .........77
FL SCROLL, Display settings ............. 68
FM antenna .......................................... 21
FM antenna connection ........................ 21
FM tuning ............................................45
FRONT B speaker setting,
Speaker settings ...............................59
FRONT B, Speaker settings ................. 59
Front input,
Multi-channel input setup ................67
Front panel display ............................... 24
Front panel display scroll,
Display settings ................................ 68
FRONT SP, Speaker settings ............... 59
Front speakers, Speaker settings .......... 59
FRONT, Multi-channel input setup ..... 67
■ G
G)AUDIO SET, Sound menu .............. 63
Games, Sound field program ...............40
■ H
H) HDMI SET, Sound menu ...............64
Hall, Sound field program ................... 40
HDMI indicator .................................... 24
HDMI set, Sound menu ....................... 64
HDMI, Connection .............................. 14
HEADPHONE, Dynamic range ..........63
Headphone, Dynamic range ................. 63
HEADPHONE,
Low-frequency effect level ..............62
Headphone,
Low-frequency effect level ..............62
Headphones .......................................... 37
Headphones indicator .......................... 24
High quality sound ............................... 43
■ I
I) EXTD SUR., Sound menu ............... 64
INFO, Radio Data System
program type ....................................49
Infrared window, Remote control ........ 25
INI.VOL., Audio settings ....................63
Initial volume, Audio settings .............. 63
Input assignment, Input menu .............. 65
INPUT CH,
Multi-channel input setup ................67
Input channel and speaker indicators
...... 25
Input channel indicators .......................25
Input channels,
Multi-channel input setup ................67
Input menu, Manual setup ................... 57
Input rename, Input menu ....................66
Input source indicators .........................24
Input source information display ......... 38
iPod connected,
iPod controlling status message .......85
iPod control, Status message ................85
iPod using .............................................53
■ J
Jazz, Sound field program ....................40
■ L
LFE/BASS OUT, Speaker settings ......60
LFE/Bass out, Speaker settings ............60
LIGHT M, Radio Data System
program type ....................................49
Loading..., iPod controlling status
message ............................................85
Low-frequency effect level,
Sound menu .....................................62
LVL ......................................................28
LVL, Auto setup result .........................28
■ M
M.O.R. M, Radio Data System
program type ....................................49
Manual preset tuning,
FM/AM tuning .................................46
MANUAL SETUP, SET MENU .........57
Manual setup, SET MENU ..................57
Manual tuning, FM/AM tuning ............45
MAX VOL., Audio settings .................63
Maximum volume, Audio settings .......63
MD recorder, Connection .....................19
Memory guard, Option menu ...............68
Menu browse mode,
iPod controlling ................................54
Movie Dramatic,
Sound field program ........................40
Movie Spacious,
Sound field program ........................40
MULTI CH INPUT
component selection .........................36
MULTI CH INPUT jacks .....................19
Multi channel input setup,
Input menu .......................................67
Multi-channel source
with headphones ...............................41
Multi-format player connection ...........19
Multi-information display ....................25
MULTI-ZONE Configuration ..............74
MUTE ..................................................37
MUTE indicator ...................................24
MUTE TYPE, Audio settings ..............63
Muting ..................................................37
■ N
Neo:6 Cinema .......................................41
Neo:6 Music .........................................41
NEWS, Radio Data System
program type ....................................49
Night listening mode ............................44
Number of speakers ..............................28
Number of speakers,
Auto setup result ..............................28
■ O
OPTICAL IN (2) ..................................65
OPTICAL IN (2), Input assignment .... 65
OPTICAL IN (3), Input assignment .... 65
OPTICAL INPUT assignment,
Input assignment ............................. 65
OPTICAL OUT (4),
Output assignment ........................... 65
OPTIMIZER MIC jack, Auto setup .... 26
Optimizer microphone ......................... 26
Optimizer microphone, Auto setup ..... 26
Optimizing speaker setting .................. 26
Option menu, Manual setup ................ 58
OSD SHIFT, Display settings ............. 68
OSD shift, Display settings ................. 68
OSD-AMP, Display settings ............... 68
OSD-SOURCE, Display settings ........ 68
Other components controlling
by remote control ............................ 72
Other components controlling,
Remote control ................................ 72
OTHER M, Radio Data System
program type ................................... 49
■ P
PANORAMA,
Sound field parameter ..................... 42
Panorama, Sound field parameter ........ 42
Parameter initialization,
Option menu .................................... 69
PCM indicator ..................................... 24
PHONES jack ...................................... 37
Play information display,
iPod controlling ............................... 54
Play information display,
USB controlling ............................... 52
Playing video sources
in the background ............................ 38
PLII Game ........................................... 41
PLII Movie .......................................... 41
PLII Music ........................................... 41
PLIIx Game ......................................... 41
PLIIx Movie ........................................ 41
PLIIx Music ......................................... 41
POP M, Radio Data System
program type ................................... 49
Pop/Rock, Sound field program .......... 40
Power cable, Connection ..................... 22
Preset SCENE templates ..................... 32
Preset station exchange,
FM/AM tuning ................................ 47
Preset station selection,
FM/AM tuning ................................ 47
PRESET, Advanced setup ................... 77
Pro Logic ............................................. 41
Program service, Radio Data System
information ...................................... 48
Program type, Radio Data System
information ...................................... 48
PS indicator ......................................... 25
PS, Radio Data System information
....... 48
PTY HOLD indicator .......................... 25
PTY indicator ...................................... 25
PTY SEEK mode, Radio Data System
tuning ............................................... 49
Index
94 En
PTY,
Radio Data System information ......48
PVR connection ................................... 18
■ R
Radio Data System indicator ............... 25
Radio Data System tuning ................... 48
Radio text, Radio Data System
information ...................................... 48
Remote control codes ............................iii
Remote control, Troubleshooting ........ 87
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ..................... 20
Rename, SCENE template ................... 33
Repeat .................................................. 54
Repeat, iPod controlling ...................... 54
Resetting the system ............................ 87
ROCK M, Radio Data System
program type .................................... 49
RT indicator ......................................... 25
RT, Radio Data System information
...... 48
■ S
S VIDEO jacks ..................................... 13
SB L/R SP, Speaker settings ................ 60
SCENE 1 ................................................ 7
SCENE IR code setting,
Advanced setup ............................... 77
SCENE IR, Advanced setup ................ 77
SCENE template selection ................... 30
SCIENCE, Radio Data System
program type .................................... 49
Selection, Audio input jacks ................ 36
Selection,
MULTI CH INPUT component ...... 36
Selection, Preset station,
FM/AM tuning ................................. 47
Selection, Radio Data System
program type .................................... 49
Selection, SCENE template ................. 30
SET MENU .......................................... 57
Setting remote control codes ................ 73
Setting SCENE template input source,
Remote control ................................ 34
Set-top box connection ........................ 18
Shuffle, iPod controlling ...................... 54
SILENT CINEMA ............................... 41
SILENT CINEMA indicator ................ 25
Simple remote mode,
iPod controlling ............................... 53
SIZE ..................................................... 27
SIZE, Auto setup .................................. 27
SLEEP indicator .................................. 25
Sleep timer ........................................... 39
Sound field programs
with headphones .............................. 41
Sound menu, Manual setup .................. 57
Source feature OSD display time,
Display settings ............................... 68
SP ......................................................... 28
SP A B indicators ................................. 24
SP, Auto setup result ............................ 28
Speaker distance ............................ 27, 28
Speaker distance, Auto setup ............... 27
Speaker distance, Auto setup result ..... 28
Speaker distance, Sound menu .............62
Speaker distances, Speaker distance
.......62
Speaker level ........................................28
Speaker level adjustment .....................43
Speaker level, Auto setup result ...........28
Speaker level, Sound menu ..................61
Speaker settings, Sound menu .............59
Speaker size ..........................................27
Speaker size, Auto setup ......................27
Speaker wiring .....................................27
Speaker wiring, Auto setup ..................27
Speaker wiring/volume level,
Auto setup ........................................27
SPEAKER, Dynamic range .................63
Speaker, Dynamic range ......................63
SPEAKER,
Low-frequency effect level ..............62
Speaker, Low-frequency effect level
......62
Specifications .......................................91
SPORT, Radio Data System
program type ....................................49
Standby mode, Zone 2 .........................76
STRAIGHT ..........................................41
Straight .................................................41
SUBWOOFER PHASE,
Speaker settings ...............................61
Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ......61
SUPPORT AUDIO, HDMI set ............64
Support audio, HDMI set .....................64
SUR. L/R SP, Speaker settings ............60
Surround back left/right speakers,
Speaker settings ...............................60
Surround left/right speakers,
Speaker settings ...............................60
■ T
Test tone, Center speaker equalizer .....62
TEST, Center speaker equalizer ...........62
Tonal quality adjustment ......................43
Troubleshooting ...................................78
TU, Advanced setup .............................77
Tuner (FM/AM), Troubleshooting .......81
Tuner frequency step,
Advanced setup ................................77
Tuner indicators ...................................24
Turning off the power ..........................23
Turning on the power ...........................23
TV Sports, Sound field program ..........40
■ U
Unable to play, iPod controlling status
message ............................................85
UNIT, Speaker distance .......................62
Unit, Speaker distance ..........................62
Unknown iPod, iPod controlling status
message ............................................85
Unplug HP!,
Auto setup error message .................82
USB memory device using,
USB portable audio player using .....51
USB playback operation ......................51
USB playback styles ............................70
USB, Troubleshooting .........................84
■ V
VARIED, Radio Data System
program type ................................... 49
VCR connection .................................. 18
VIDEO AUX jacks, Front panel ......... 21
Video components, Connection .......... 16
VIDEO CONV., Display settings ........ 67
Video conversion, Display settings ..... 67
Video information ............................... 38
VIDEO jacks ....................................... 13
Video jacks .......................................... 13
Video signal flow ................................ 15
Video sources in the background ........ 38
Virtual CINEMA DSP ......................... 41
VIRTUAL indicator ............................ 25
VOLTAGE SELECTOR ....................... 3
VOLUME level indicator .................... 24
Volume Trim, Input menu ................... 66
■ W
W-1:OUT OF PHASE,
Auto setup error message ................ 83
W-2:DISTANCE ERROR,
Auto setup error message ................ 83
W-3:LEVEL ERROR,
Auto setup error message ................ 83
WIRING/LEVEL ................................ 27
WIRING/LEVEL, Auto setup ............. 27
■ Y
Yamaha iPod universal dock,
Connection ...................................... 20
Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer ......................................... 26
YPAO .................................................. 26
YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room
Acoustic Optimizer) ........................ 26
YPAO indicator ................................... 24
■ Z
Zone 2 .................................................. 74
ZONE2 indicator ................................. 24
“MSPEAKER” or “
3
DVD”
(example) indicates the name of the
parts on the front panel or the remote
control. Refer to the attached sheet
or the pages at the end of this manual
for the information about each
position of the parts.
95 En
English
Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland
Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs guarantee service, please contact the dealer from
whom it was purchased. If you experience any difficulty, please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our
website (http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident).
The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha
undertakes, subject to the conditions listed below, to have the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamaha’s discretion, without any charge
for parts or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and condition, where a model has been
discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair.
Conditions
1. The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealer’s name) MUST accompany the defective product, along with a
statement detailing the fault. In the absence of this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and the
product may be returned at the customer’s expense.
2. The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland.
3. The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in writing by Yamaha.
4. The following are excluded from this guarantee:
a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear.
b. Damage resulting from:
(1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party.
(2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please note that it is the customer’s responsibility to
ensure the product is adequately packaged when returning the product for repair.
(3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in accordance with Yamaha’s instructions on the proper
use, maintenance and storage, and (b) installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in force in
the country where it is used.
(4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond Yamaha’s control.
(5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third party products.
(6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product does not conform to the technical or safety
standards of the country of use and/or to the standard specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland.
(7) Non AV (Audio Visual) related products.
(Products subject to “Yamaha AV Guarantee Statement” are defined in our website at http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or
http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident.)
5. Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the guarantee of the country of use shall apply.
6. Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the
product.
7. Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration or loss to such settings or data.
8. This guarantee does not affect the consumer’s statutory rights under applicable national laws in force or the consumer’s rights against the dealer arising
from their sales/purchase contract.
i
■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Voorpaneel/
Фронтальная панель
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
A/B/C/D/E
BAND
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
ZONE
CONTROL
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
AUDIO SELECT
DIRECTSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
MAIN ZONE
SYSTEM OFF
ON/OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX USB
ADEFG
L
BC KIHJ
MROQ STPN
ii
APPENDIX
■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/
Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT DIRECT
PARAMETER
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
CD
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
MEMORY
AVTV
SCENE
4321
USB A B
FREQ/TEXT EON
MODE - PTY SEEK - START
1
G
I
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
D
0
E
F
C
iii
List of remote control codes
Liste des codes de commande
Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder
Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes
Список кодов дистанционного управления
Blu-ray player
Samsung 2137
CD player
Yamaha 5000, 5013
CD Recorder
Yamaha 5001
DVD
Acoustic Solutions
2078
Aiwa 2055, 2100
Akai 2096
Akura 2076
Alba 2078, 2086
Apex 2027, 2049
Awa 2078
Axion 2078
Brainwave 2096
Brandt 2073, 2085
Broksonic 2060
Bush 2075, 2078, 2112
Centrex 2077
Classic 2078
Clatronic 2075
Coby 2078
C-Tech 2074
CyberHome 2025, 2079, 2091
Daewoo 2092, 2098
Dansai 2096
Daytek 2080, 2089
DEC 2075
Denon 2030, 2102, 2103
Denver 2075, 2076
Diamond 2074
DK Digital 2094
Dual 2078
D-Vision 2096
DVX 2074
Elta 2096
Euroline 2096
Funai 2052, 2058
Global Solutions2074
Global Sphere 2074
Goodmans 2075, 2077, 2078
Grundig 2077, 2098
H&B 2075
Haaz 2074
HE 2078
Hitachi 2032, 2072
Home Electronics
2078
Innovation 2072
Irradio 2134
JDB 2078
JVC 2033, 2045, 2053,
2073, 2099
Kenwood 2030, 2097
Kingavon 2075
Koda 2075
Lawson 2074
Lenco 2075
LG 2084, 2087
Lifetec 2072
Limit 2074
LogicLab 2074
Luxor 2077
Magnavox 2037, 2073, 2075
Magnum 2072
MBO 2078
Medion 2072
Micromaxx 2072
Micromedia 2073
Microstar 2072
Mitsubishi 2035
Mizuda 2075
Mustek 2078
Naiko 2077
Onkyo 2073, 2135
Orava 2075
P&B 2075
Pacific 2074
Panasonic 2030, 2040, 2054,
2057, 2105, 2110
Philips 2019, 2026, 2046,
2073, 2081, 2090
Pioneer 2036, 2082
Proline 2077
Provision 2075
RCA 2031, 2042, 2050,
2051
Red Star 2076
Reoc 2074
Roadstar 2075, 2078, 2086
Rowa 2077
Saba 2085
Sabaki 2074
Samsung 2032, 2041, 2104,
2113
Sansui 2074
Sanyo 2095
ScanMagic 2078
Scientific Labs 2074
Scott 2088
SEG 2074, 2086
Sharp 2034, 2043, 2059,
2093, 2106
Silva 2076
Singer 2074
Skymaster 2074, 2078
Skyworth 2076
SM Electronic 2074, 2078
Sony 2028, 2029, 2039,
2083, 2107
Soundmaster 2074
Soundmax 2074
Standard 2074
Star Cluster 2074
Starmedia 2075
Supervision 2074, 2078
Sylvania 2052, 2058
Synn 2074
TCM 2072
Teac 2074
Tec 2076
Technics 2030
Technika 2096
Technosonic 2096
Tevion 2072, 2074
Thomson 2085, 2109
Tokai 2076
Toshiba 2026, 2044, 2048,
2056, 2073, 2108,
2111
United 2078
Voxson 2078
Wharfedale 2074
Xlogic 2074
Yakumo 2077
Yamada 2077
Yamaha 2000, 2001, 2003,
2030, 2101
Yukai 2078
Zenith 2038, 2047, 2073
DVD Recorder
Apex 2024
JVC 2070
LG 2071
Panasonic 2020, 2065, 2066,
2067
Philips 2019, 2061, 2062,
2063
Pioneer 2021
RCA 2018
Sony 2022, 2064
Toshiba 2068
Yamaha 2023
Yukai 2069
DVD/LD
Pioneer 2036
DVD/VCR
JVC 1017, 2045
LG 1071, 2087
Panasonic 1020, 1072, 2040,
2105
Philips 1025
RCA 1022, 2042
Samsung 1021, 2041, 2104
Sharp 1023, 1073, 2043,
2106
Sony 1019, 1074, 2039,
2107
Toshiba 1024, 1075, 2044,
2108
Zenith 1026, 2047
DVD-DVR
Panasonic 2067
Pioneer 2114
Samsung 2115
Toshiba 2068
DVR
ABS 2132
Alienware 2132
CyberPower 2132
Dell 2132
DIRECTV 2123, 2128, 2129,
2133
DISH Network 2126, 2127
Dishpro 2126
Echostar 2126, 2127
Expressvu 2126
Gateway 2132
GOI 2126
Hewlett Packard2132
Hitachi 2008
Howard Computers
2132
HTS 2126
Hughes 2123, 2128
Humax 2123
Hush 2132
iBUYPOWER 2132
JVC 2126, 2127
Linksys 2132
Media Center PC
2132
Microsoft 2132
Mind 2132
Niveus Media 2132
Northgate 2132
Panasonic 2015, 2016, 2017,
2120
Philips 2117, 2121, 2123,
2128
Pioneer 2012, 2013, 2014
Proscan 2129
RCA 2116, 2124, 2129,
2133
ReplayTV 2118, 2119, 2120
Sharp 2009, 2010
Sonic Blue 2119, 2120
Sony 2005, 2006, 2007,
2122, 2130, 2131,
2132
Stack 10 2132
Stack 9 2132
Systemax 2132
Tagar Systems 2132
Tivo 2116, 2121, 2122,
2123, 2130, 2131
Toshiba 2004, 2125, 2132
Touch 2132
UltimateTV 2133
Viewsonic 2132
Voodoo 2132
Yamaha 2011
ZT Group 2132
HD DVD
Toshiba 2136
iPod
Yamaha 5011
iv
APPENDIX
LD player
Yamaha 2002
MD
Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004
TAPE DECK
Yamaha 5005, 5006
TUNER
Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009,
5010, 5012, 5014,
5015, 5016, 5017,
5018
TV
Acer 0093
Acme 0207
Acura 0208
ADA 0255
ADC 0206
Admiral 0058, 0205, 0206,
0210, 0211
Adyson 0200, 0207
Agashi 0200
Agazi 0206
AGB 0204
Aiko 0127, 0200, 0207,
0208
Aiwa 0028, 0139, 0229,
0237
Akai 0059, 0065, 0127,
0129, 0130, 0200,
0204, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0217, 0218,
0255
Akiba 0209, 0218
Akura 0206, 0209, 0218
Alaron 0200
Alba 0200, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0217, 0218
ALBIRAL 0212
Allstar 0213
Amplivision 0207
Amstrad 0204, 0206, 0208,
0209, 0218
Amtron 0062
Anam 0208
Anam National 0062
Anglo 0208
Anitech 0206, 0208
Ansonic 0203, 0208
AOC 0060, 0061
Apex 0118, 0122, 0132
Arc en Ciel 0216
Arcam 0200
Arcam Delta 0207
Aristona 0213, 0217
ASA 0205, 0211
Asberg 0213
Astra 0208
Asuka 0200, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0218
Atlantic 0200, 0207, 0213,
0217
Atori 0208
Audiosonic 0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0216, 0217,
0218
AudioTon 0207
Audiovox 0062
Autovox 0205, 0206, 0207
Awa 0200
Baird 0216
Bang & Olufsen 0205
Basic Line 0208, 0209, 0213,
0218
Bastide 0207
Baur 0217
Beko 0228
Belcor 0060
Bell & Howell 0058, 0064
Benq 0081
Beon 0213, 0217
Bestar 0213
Binatone 0207
Black Star 0214
Blaupunkt 0255
Blue Sky 0209, 0218
Bondstec 0214
Boots 0207
Bradford 0062
Brandt 0216, 0226
Brionvega 0205, 0213, 0217
Britannia 0200, 0207
Brockwood 0060
Broksonic 0138
Bruns 0205
BSR 0215
BTC 0209, 0218
Bush 0177, 0208, 0209,
0210, 0213, 0215,
0216, 0217, 0218,
0230, 0237
Candle 0060, 0061
Capsonic 0206
Cascade 0208
Cathay 0213, 0217
CCE 0127
Celebrity 0059
Centurion 0213, 0217
Century 0205
CGE 0214, 0215
Cimline 0208, 0218
Citizen 0060, 0061, 0062,
0064
City 0208
Clarivox 0212, 0217
Clatronic 0206, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0213, 0214,
0218
CMS 0200
Colortyme 0060, 0061
Concerto 0060, 0061
Concorde 0208
Condor 0200, 0207, 0213
Contec 0200, 0207, 0208
Contec/Cony 0062
Continental Edison
0216
Cosmel 0208
Craig 0062
Crosley 0205, 0214, 0215
Crown 0062, 0063, 0128,
0208, 0213, 0217
CS Electronics 0200, 0207, 0209,
0214, 0218
CTC 0214
Curtis Mathes 0057, 0060, 0061,
0064, 0065
CXC 0062
Cybertron 0209, 0218
Daewoo 0060, 0061, 0120,
0127, 0155, 0193,
0200, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0218, 0238
Dainichi 0200, 0209, 0218
Dansai 0200, 0206, 0213,
0217
Dantax 0217
Daytron 0060, 0061, 0208
De Graaf 0210
Decca 0204, 0207, 0213,
0217
Desmet 0213, 0217
Diamond 0200
Dimensia 0057
Dixi 0208, 0213, 0217
DTS 0208
Dual 0207, 0215, 0216
Dual-Tec 0207, 0208, 0215
Dumont 0060, 0127, 0205,
0207
Durabrand 0126
Dux 0217
Dynatron 0213, 0217
Elbe 0203, 0204, 0212,
0218
Elbe-Sharp 0204
Elcit 0204, 0205
ELECTRO TECH
0208
Electroband 0059
Electrohome 0059, 0060, 0061
Elin 0200, 0207, 0213,
0217
Elite 0209, 0213, 0218
Elman 0215
Elta 0200, 0208
Emerson 0060, 0061, 0062,
0064, 0128, 0205
Envision 0060, 0061
Erres 0213, 0217
ESA 0080
Etron 0208
Euro-Feel 0206
Euroline 0217
Euroman 0200
Euromann 0206, 0207, 0213
Europhon 0200, 0204, 0207,
0213, 0215
Fenner 0208
Ferguson 0212, 0217, 0226
Fidelity 0200, 0207, 0210
Finlandia 0210
Finlux 0204, 0205, 0207,
0213, 0215, 0217
Firstline 0200, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0214
Fisher 0064, 0127, 0128,
0205, 0207, 0215
Flint 0213, 0218
Formenti 0200, 0205, 0207,
0215, 0217
Formenti-Phoenix
0200
Fortress 0205
Frontech 0206, 0208, 0210,
0211, 0214
Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025,
0088, 0127
Funai 0033, 0034, 0035,
0036, 0037, 0062,
0206
Futuretech 0062
Gateway 0094
GBC 0208, 0215, 0218
GE 0057, 0060, 0061,
0122, 0147
GEC 0204, 0207, 0211,
0213, 0217
Geloso 0208, 0210, 0215
General Technic 0208
Genexxa 0209, 0211, 0213,
0218
Gibralter 0060
GoldHand 0200
GoldStar 0060, 0061, 0127,
0128, 0200, 0201,
0207, 0208, 0210,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
Goodmans 0171, 0201, 0204,
0206, 0208, 0213,
0217, 0240
GPM 0209, 0218
Graetz 0211
Granada 0204, 0207, 0210,
0213, 0217
Grandin 0208, 0209, 0217
Grundig 0128, 0130, 0222,
0236, 0255
Grunpy 0062
Halifax 0200, 0206, 0207
Hallmark 0060, 0061
Hampton 0200, 0207
Hanseatic 0203, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0215, 0217
Hantarex 0204, 0208
Harvard 0062
HCM 0206, 0207, 0208,
0218
Hifivox 0216
Higashi 0200
Hinari 0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
Hisawa 0209, 0218
Hitachi 0006, 0014, 0015,
0016, 0042, 0060,
0061, 0095, 0105,
0127, 0156, 0179,
0180, 0204, 0207,
0210, 0211, 0215,
0216, 0251
Hornyphon 0213
Hoshai 0209, 0218
Huanyu 0200, 0207
Hygashi 0200, 0207
Hyper 0200, 0207, 0208,
0214, 0215
Hypson 0206, 0207, 0213,
0217
ICE 0127, 0200, 0206,
0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0218
ICeS 0200, 0218
IMA 0062
Imperial 0211, 0213, 0214,
0215
Indiana 0213, 0217
Infinity 0063
Ingelen 0211
Ingersol 0208
Inno Hit 0201, 0204, 0207,
0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
Innovation 0206, 0208
Interbuy 0208, 0214
Interfunk 0205, 0211, 0213,
0214, 0216, 0217
International 0200
Intervision 0206, 0207, 0218
Irradio 0201, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0217, 0218
Isukai 0209, 0218
ITC 0207, 0215
ITS 0200, 0209, 0213,
0218
v
ITT 0129, 0208, 0211
ITV 0208, 0217
JBL 0063
JC Penney 0057, 0060, 0061
JCB 0059
Jensen 0060, 0061
JVC 0017, 0018, 0019,
0108, 0136, 0153,
0178, 0190, 0213,
0218
Kaisui 0200, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0218
Kamosonic 0207
Kamp 0200, 0207
Kapsch 0211
Karcher 0207, 0208, 0212,
0217
Kawasho 0059, 0060, 0061,
0200
Kendo 0128, 0210
Kennedy 0215
Kenwood 0060, 0061
Kingsley 0200, 0207
Kloss Novabeam
0062
Kneissel 0203
Kolster 0213
Konka 0209, 0218
Korpel 0213, 0217
Korting 0205
Koyoda 0208
KTV 0062, 0127, 0207
Kyoto 0200, 0212
Lenco 0208
Lenoir 0207, 0208
Lesa 0214
Leyco 0206, 0213, 0217
LG 0016, 0038, 0039,
0127, 0128, 0157,
0158, 0163, 0164,
0166, 0188, 0189,
0200, 0201, 0207,
0208, 0210, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
Liesenk 0217
Life 0206, 0208
Lifetec 0206, 0208, 0218
Loewe 0063, 0128, 0203,
0204, 0223, 0227
Loewe Opta 0205, 0213, 0217
Logik 0058
Luma 0210, 0217
Lumatron 0210, 0213, 0217
Lux May 0213
Luxman 0060, 0061
Luxor 0201, 0207, 0210
LXI 0057, 0061, 0063,
0064
Magnadyne 0204, 0205, 0214,
0215, 0217
Magnafon 0200, 0204, 0207
Magnavox 0060, 0061, 0063,
0102, 0103, 0150
Magnum 0206, 0208
Majestic 0058
Mandor 0206
Manesth 0206, 0207, 0213,
0217
Marantz 0060, 0061, 0063,
0090, 0213, 0217
Marelli 0205
Mark 0200, 0213, 0217
Matsui 0204, 0207, 0208,
0210, 0213, 0217
Mediator 0213, 0217
Medion 0206, 0208
Megatron 0061
Melectronic 0200, 0207, 0208,
0211, 0213, 0216,
0217
Memorex 0058, 0061, 0064,
0208
Memphis 0208
Metz 0205
MGA 0060, 0061
Micromaxx 0206, 0208
Microstar 0206, 0208
Minerva 0204
Minoka 0213
Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016,
0048, 0060, 0061,
0104, 0112, 0113,
0125, 0205, 0213
Mivar 0200, 0201, 0202,
0203, 0204, 0207
Montgomery Ward
0058
MTC 0060, 0061, 0128,
0200
Multi System 0217
Multitech 0062, 0127, 0128,
0200, 0207, 0208,
0210, 0214, 0215,
0217
Murphy 0200, 0207
NAD 0061
Naonis 0210
NEC 0026, 0053, 0060,
0061, 0096, 0127
Neckermann 0205, 0207, 0210,
0213, 0217, 0255
NEI 0213, 0217
Nesco 0214
NET-TV 0082, 0101
New Tech 0208, 0213
New World 0209, 0218
Nicamagic 0200, 0207
Nikkai 0200, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0213, 0217,
0218
Nikko 0061
Nobliko 0200, 0207
Nogamatic 0216
Nokia 0129, 0211
Nordmende 0205, 0211, 0213,
0216
Nordvision 0217
Oceanic 0211
Olevia 0084
ONCEAS 0207
Onwa 0062, 0218
Orbit 0213
Orion 0126, 0204, 0208,
0213, 0217, 0235
Orline 0218
Orsowe 0204
Osaki 0127, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0218
Osio 0201
Oso 0209, 0218
Osume 0218
Otto Versand 0204, 0207, 0213,
0215, 0216, 0217,
0255
Pael 0200, 0207
Palladium 0207
Panama 0200, 0206, 0207,
0208
Panasonic 0006, 0007, 0063,
0073, 0074, 0097,
0110, 0114, 0137,
0141, 0151, 0162,
0165, 0186, 0204,
0211, 0244, 0245,
0246, 0254
Pathe Cinema 0200, 0203, 0207,
0212, 0215
Pathe Marconi 0212, 0216
Pausa 0208
Perdio 0200
Philco 0060, 0061, 0063,
0128, 0205, 0214,
0215
Philharmonic 0207
Philips 0040, 0060, 0063,
0072, 0115, 0116,
0124, 0130, 0150,
0175, 0184, 0187,
0205, 0207, 0213,
0215, 0217, 0220,
0221, 0232, 0233,
0252, 0253
Philips Magnavox
0124
Phoenix 0200, 0205, 0213,
0217
Phonola 0200, 0205, 0213,
0217
Pilot 0060
Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0060,
0061, 0098, 0109,
0117, 0128, 0181,
0182, 0194, 0195,
0211, 0213, 0216,
0217, 0250
Plantron 0206, 0213
Polaroid 0075
Poppy 0208
Portland 0060, 0061
Prandoni-Prince 0204, 0210
Precision 0207
Prima 0208, 0211
Profex 0208
Profi-Tronic 0213
Proline 0213
Proscan 0057
Prosonic 0200, 0207, 0217
Protech 0206, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
Proton 0060, 0061
Provision 0217
Pulsar 0060
Pye 0213, 0217
Pymi 0208
Quasar 0152, 0214
Quelle 0201, 0206, 0207,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
Radialva 0218
Radio Shack 0064
Radio Shack/Realistic
0057, 0060, 0061,
0062, 0064
Radiola 0213, 0217
Radiomarelli 0204, 0205, 0214
Radiotone 0213
RCA 0057, 0060, 0061,
0091, 0133, 0135,
0147, 0149
Realistic 0064
Revox 0213, 0217
Rex 0206, 0210, 0211
RFT 0203, 0205
Rhapsody 0200
R-Line 0213, 0217
Roadstar 0206, 0208, 0209,
0218, 0237
Robotron 0205
Rowa 0200
RTF 0205
Saba 0204, 0205, 0211,
0216
saccs 0212
Saisho 0204, 0206, 0207,
0208
Salora 0201, 0204, 0210,
0211, 0215
Sambers 0204
Sampo 0060, 0061, 0083,
0101
Samsung 0029, 0030, 0031,
0032, 0044, 0045,
0046, 0047, 0060,
0061, 0065, 0068,
0069, 0071, 0079,
0087, 0127, 0128,
0130, 0144, 0160,
0161, 0170, 0176,
0183, 0185, 0200,
0201, 0206, 0207,
0208, 0213, 0217,
0239, 0241, 0242,
0243
Sandra 0200, 0207
Sansui 0123, 0126, 0213
Sanyo 0020, 0021, 0022,
0049, 0060, 0064,
0127, 0128, 0200,
0203, 0207, 0215
SBR 0217
SCHAUB LORENTZ
0211
Schneider 0207, 0209, 0213,
0215, 0216, 0217,
0218
Scotch 0061
Scott 0060, 0061, 0062
Sears 0057, 0060, 0061,
0064
SEG 0200, 0206, 0207,
0214, 0215, 0217
SEI 0204
SEI-Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0211
Seleco 0210, 0211, 0215
Sencora 0208
Sentra 0218
Serino 0200
Sharp 0009, 0010, 0011,
0060, 0061, 0066,
0070, 0087, 0111,
0143, 0145, 0167,
0168, 0169, 0198,
0204, 0224, 0247,
0248, 0249
Shogun 0060
Siarem 0204, 0205, 0215
Sicatel 0212
Siemens 0255
Sierra 0213
Signature 0058
Silva 0200
Singer 0205, 0214, 0215
Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0215,
0217
Skantic 0211
Solavox 0211
vi
APPENDIX
Sonoko 0206, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0217
Sonolor 0211
Sontec 0213, 0217
Sony 0041, 0059, 0067,
0085, 0086, 0174,
0196, 0199, 0208,
0219, 0234
Sound & Vision 0209, 0218
Soundesign 0060, 0061, 0062
Soundwave 0213, 0217
SSS 0060, 0062
Standard 0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0218
Starlight 0217
Starlite 0062
Stenway 0218
Stern 0210, 0211
Sunkai 0208, 0218
Sunwood 0208, 0213
Superla 0200, 0204, 0207
SuperTech 0200
Supra 0208
Supreme 0059
Susumu 0209
Sutron 0208
Sydney 0200, 0207
Sylvania 0060, 0061, 0063,
0080, 0134, 0142,
0148
Symphonic 0062, 0080
Sysline 0217
Sytong 0200
Tandy 0127, 0207, 0209,
0211, 0218
Tashiko 0200, 0207, 0210
Tatung 0127, 0204, 0207,
0213, 0217, 0237
TCM 0206, 0208
Teac 0127
Tec 0207, 0208, 0214,
0215
Techwood 0060, 0061
Teknika 0058, 0060, 0061,
0062
Teleavia 0216
Telecor 0218
Telefunken 0065, 0213, 0216
Telegazi 0218
Teletech 0208, 0214, 0217
Teleton 0207
Televideon 0200
Tensai 0208, 0209, 0213,
0218
Tesmet 0213
Tevion 0206, 0208
Texet 0200, 0207
Thomson 0191, 0192, 0207,
0213, 0216, 0226
Thorn 0212, 0217
TMK 0060, 0061
Tokai 0213
Tokyo 0200, 0207
Toshiba 0027, 0043, 0053,
0054, 0064, 0078,
0089, 0090, 0106,
0107, 0127, 0131,
0140, 0146, 0159,
0197, 0225, 0231,
0237
Towada 0211, 0215
Transtec 0200
Trident 0204
Tristar 0218
Triumph 0204
Uher 0211, 0213
Ultravox 0200, 0205, 0207,
0214, 0215
United 0217
Universum 0127, 0128, 0129,
0201, 0206, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
Univox 0212
Vestel 0210, 0211, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
Vexa 0208, 0217
Victor 0213
VIDEOLOGIC 0200
Videologique 0200, 0207, 0209,
0218
Videosat 0214
VideoSystem 0213
Videotechnic 0200
Vidtech 0060, 0061
Viewsonic 0076, 0077, 0092,
0099, 0172, 0173
Visiola 0200, 0207
Vision 0213
Vortec 0213, 0217
Voxson 0205, 0210, 0211,
0213
Waltham 0207, 0212
Wards 0057, 0058, 0060,
0061, 0063
Watson 0213, 0217, 0218
Watt Radio 0200, 0207, 0212,
0215
Wega 0205
Weltblick 0213, 0217
Weston 0215
White Westinghouse
0200, 0207, 0217
Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002,
0003, 0004, 0005,
0060, 0061
Yamishi 0218
Yoko 0200, 0206, 0207,
0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
Yorx 0209, 0218
Zanussi 0210
Zenith 0058, 0060, 0100,
0105, 0119, 0121,
0154
TV/DVD
Aiwa 0139, 2055
Apex 0132, 2049
Broksonic 0138, 2060
Bush 0230, 2112
JVC 0136, 2053
Panasonic 0137, 0254, 2054,
2110
RCA 0133, 0135, 2050,
2051
Sylvania 0134, 2052
Thomson 0226, 2109
Toshiba 0131, 0231, 2048,
2111
TV/DVD/VCR
Panasonic 0141, 1040, 2057
Samsung 0241, 1070, 2113
Sharp 0143, 1028, 2059
Sylvania 0142, 1041, 2058
Toshiba 0140, 1029, 2056
TV/VCR
Aiwa 0237, 1066
Bush 0237, 1066
Daewoo 0155, 0238, 1038,
1067
GE 0147, 1030
Goodmans 0240, 1069
Grundig 0236, 1062
Hitachi 0156, 1039
JVC 0153, 1036
Magnavox 0150, 1033
Orion 0235, 1065
Panasonic 0151, 1034
Philips 0150, 0232, 0233,
1033, 1062, 1063
Quasar 0152, 1035
RCA 0149, 1032
Roadstar 0237, 1066
Samsung 0144, 0239, 1027,
1068
Sharp 0145, 1028
Sony 0234, 1064
Sylvania 0148, 1031
Tatung 0237, 1066
Toshiba 0146, 0237, 1029,
1066
Zenith 0154, 1037
VCR
Admiral 1008, 1013
Adventura 1005
Aiwa 1005, 1042, 1043,
1044, 1066
Akai 1007, 1043
Akiba 1050
Akura 1043, 1050
Alba 1044, 1050
American High 1004
Amstrad 1042
Anitech 1050
ASA 1045, 1046
Asha 1002, 1014
Asuka 1042, 1045, 1046,
1050
Audio Dynamics1000
Audiovox 1003
Baird 1042, 1043, 1047
Basic Line 1044, 1050
Baur 1046
Beaumark 1002, 1014
Bell & Howell 1001
Blaupunkt 1046, 1048
Broksonic 1012, 1013
Bush 1044, 1050, 1066
Calix 1003
Candle 1002, 1003
Canon 1004
CCE 1006
CGE 1042, 1043
Cimline 1044, 1050
Citizen 1002, 1003
Colortyme 1000
Colt 1006
Craig 1002, 1003, 1006,
1014
Crown 1050
Curtis Mathes 1000, 1002, 1004,
1009
Cybernex 1002, 1014
Daewoo 1005, 1038, 1061,
1067
Dansai 1050
Dantax 1044
DBX 1000
De Graaf 1046, 1049
Decca 1042, 1043, 1046
Denon 1010
Dimensia 1009
Dual 1043, 1046
Dumont 1042, 1046, 1047,
1049
Dynatech 1005
Electrohome 1003
Electrophonic 1003
Elta 1050
Emerson 1003, 1004, 1005,
1012, 1013
Etzuko 1050
Ferguson 1043
Fidelity 1042
Finlandia 1046, 1047, 1049
Finlux 1042, 1043, 1046,
1047, 1049
FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049,
1050
Fisher 1001, 1047
Flint 1044
Formenti/Phoenix
1046
Fuji 1004
Fujitsu 1042
Funai 1005, 1042
Galaxy 1042
Garrard 1005
GBC 1050
GE 1002, 1004, 1009,
1014, 1030
GEC 1046
Geloso 1050
General Technic 1044, 1048
Go Video 1014
GoldHand 1050
Goldstar 1000, 1003, 1042,
1045
Goodmans 1042, 1045, 1050,
1069
Gradiente 1005
Graetz 1043, 1047
Granada 1046, 1047, 1049
Grandin 1042, 1045, 1050
Grundig 1046, 1050, 1062
Hanseatic 1045, 1046
Harley Davidson1005
Harman/Kardon 1000
Harwood 1006
HCM 1050
Headquarter 1001
Hinari 1044, 1050
Hisawa 1044
Hitachi 1007, 1010, 1039,
1042, 1043, 1046,
1049
Hughes Network Systems
1010
Hypson 1044, 1050
Imperial 1042
Inno Hit 1046, 1050
Innovation 1044, 1048
Instant Replay 1004
Interbuy 1045
Interfunk 1046, 1047
Intervision 1042
Irradio 1045, 1050
ITT 1043, 1047
ITV 1045
JC Penney 1000, 1001, 1002,
1003, 1004, 1006
JCL 1004
Jensen 1007
JVC 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1017, 1036,
1043
Kaisui 1050
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
LEVEL 1, 99 QUEENSBRIDGE STREET, SOUTHBANK, VIC 3006, AUSTRALIA
©
2008 All rights reserved.
RX-V563
Printed in China WN25560
RX-V563
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
G
Karcher 1046
Kendo 1044
Kenwood 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1043
KLH 1006
Kodak 1003, 1004
Korpel 1050
Leyco 1050
LG 1003, 1042, 1045,
1071
Lifetec 1044, 1048
Lloyd's 1005
Loewe 1048
Loewe Opta 1045, 1046
Logik 1006, 1050
Luxor 1047
LXI 1003
M Electronic 1042
Magnasonic 1047
Magnavox 1004, 1018, 1033
Magnin 1003, 1014
Manesth 1050
Marantz 1000, 1001, 1004,
1046, 1051
Marta 1003
Matsui 1044, 1045
Matsushita 1004
Mediator 1046
Medion 1044, 1048
MEI 1004
Memorex 1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008,
1013, 1014, 1042,
1045, 1047
Memphis 1050
Metz 1048
MGA 1014
MGN Technology
1002, 1014
Micromaxx 1044, 1048
Microstar 1044, 1048
Migros 1042
Minolta 1010
Mitsubishi 1011, 1042, 1046
Montgomery Ward
1008
Motorola 1004, 1008
MTC 1002, 1014
Multitech 1002, 1005, 1006,
1042, 1046, 1050
Murphy 1042
National 1048
NEC 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1043, 1051
Neckermann 1043, 1046
NEI 1046
Nesco 1050
Nikko 1003
Noblex 1002, 1014
Nokia 1043, 1047
Nordmende 1043
Oceanic 1042, 1043
Okano 1044
Olympus 1004
Optimus 1003, 1008
Orion 1012, 1013, 1044,
1065
Orson 1042
Osaki 1042, 1045, 1050
Otto Versand 1046
Palladium 1043, 1045, 1050
Panasonic 1004, 1020, 1034,
1040, 1048, 1054,
1072
Pathe Marconi 1043
Penney 1010, 1014
Pentax 1010, 1049
Perdio 1042
Philco 1004, 1051
Philips 1004, 1025, 1033,
1046, 1056, 1057,
1059, 1062, 1063
Philips Magnavox
1018
Phonola 1046
Pilot 1003
Pioneer 1011, 1046
Prinz 1042
Profex 1050
Profitronic 1014
Proline 1042
Proscan 1009
Prosonic 1044
Protec 1006
Pye 1046, 1056
Quarter 1001
Quartz 1001, 1047
Quasar 1004, 1035
Quelle 1042, 1046, 1047
Radio Shack 1003
Radio Shack/Realistic
1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008
Radiola 1046
Radix 1003
Randex 1003
RCA 1002, 1004, 1009,
1010, 1014, 1015,
1022, 1032
Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008
Rex 1043
RFT 1046
Roadstar 1045, 1050, 1066
Saba 1043
Saisho 1044, 1050
Salora 1047
Samsung 1002, 1014, 1021,
1027, 1052, 1068,
1070
Sanky 1008
Sansui 1007, 1011, 1013,
1043
Sanyo 1001, 1002, 1014,
1047
SBR 1046
Schaub Lorenz 1042, 1043, 1047
Schneider 1042, 1044, 1045,
1046, 1050
Scott 1012
Sears 1001, 1003, 1004,
1010
SEG 1050
SEI-Sinudyne 1046
Seleco 1043
Sentron 1050
Sharp 1008, 1023, 1028,
1053, 1073
Shintom 1006, 1047, 1050
Shivaki 1045
Shogun 1002, 1014
Siemens 1045, 1047
Signature 2000 1008
Silva 1045
Singer 1004, 1006
Sinudyne 1046
Sontec 1045
Sony 1016, 1019, 1055,
1060, 1064, 1074
STS 1004, 1010
Sunkai 1044
Sunstar 1042
Suntronic 1042
Sunwood 1050
Sylvania 1004, 1005, 1031,
1041
Symphonic 1005
Taisho 1044
Tandy 1001
Tashiko 1003, 1042
Tatung 1007, 1042, 1043,
1046, 1066
TCM 1044, 1048
Teac 1005, 1007
Technics 1004, 1048
Teknika 1003, 1004, 1005
Teleavia 1043
Telefunken 1043
Tenosal 1050
Tensai 1042, 1045, 1050
Tevion 1044, 1048
Thomson 1043, 1058
Thorn 1043, 1047
TMK 1002, 1014
Tokai 1045, 1050
Tonsai 1050
Toshiba 1013, 1024, 1029,
1043, 1046, 1066,
1075
Totevision 1002, 1003, 1014
Towada 1050
Towika 1050
Uher 1045
Unitech 1002, 1014
Universum 1042, 1045, 1046
Vector Research 1000
Video Concepts 1000
Videon 1044, 1048
Videosonic 1002, 1014
Wards 1002, 1003, 1004,
1005, 1006, 1008,
1010, 1014
Weltblick 1045
White Westinghouse
1013
XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006
Yamaha 1000, 1001, 1007
Yamis h i 1050
Yokan 1050
Yoko 1045, 1050
Zenith 1013, 1026, 1037
RX-V563_G-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, January 16, 2008 8:57 AM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.
Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi.
Die umkreisten Zahlen und Buchstaben entsprechen denen in der Bedienungsanleitung.
Inringade nummer och bokstäver motsvarar de som anges i bruksanvisningen.
I manuali e le lettere dell’alfabeto corrispondono a quelli nel Manuale di istruzioni.
Los números y las letras en el interior de círculos se corresponden con aquellos del manual de instrucciones.
De omcirkelde cijfers en letters corresponderen met die in de Gebruiksaanwijzing.
Цифры и буквы в кружках относятся к цифрам и буквам в Инструкции по эксплуатации.
带圆圈的数字和文字与说明书中的同类数字和文字相对应。
원 번호 및 원 알파벳은 사용 설명서 안의 표기와 일치합니다 .
■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Pannello anteriore/Panel delantero/Voorpaneel/
Фронтальная панель/ 前部面板 / 전변 패널
RX-V563
RTKAGLEF
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
A/B/C/D/E
BAND
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
ZONE
CONTROL
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
AUDIO SELECT
DIRECTSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
MAIN ZONE
SYSTEM OFF
ON/OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX USB
A DE FG
L
M RO Q S TP
B C
N
KIH J
00_Sheet_RX-V563_EX.book Page 1 Monday, January 7, 2008 5:30 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/
Telecomando/Mando a distancia/Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ/ 遥控器 /
리모콘
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT DIRECT
PARAMETER
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
CD
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
MEMORY
AVTV
SCENE
4321
USB A B
FREQ/TEXT EON
MODE - PTY SEEK - START
1
G
I
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
D
0
E
F
C
WN26140
Printed in China
00_Sheet_RX-V563_EX.book Page i Monday, January 7, 2008 5:30 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
Documenttranscriptie
RX-V563_G-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, January 16, 2008 8:57 AM G Karcher Kendo Kenwood National NEC 1048 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043, 1051 Neckermann 1043, 1046 NEI 1046 Nesco 1050 Nikko 1003 Noblex 1002, 1014 Nokia 1043, 1047 Nordmende 1043 Oceanic 1042, 1043 Okano 1044 Olympus 1004 Optimus 1003, 1008 Orion 1012, 1013, 1044, 1065 Orson 1042 Osaki 1042, 1045, 1050 Otto Versand 1046 Palladium 1043, 1045, 1050 Panasonic 1004, 1020, 1034, 1040, 1048, 1054, 1072 Pathe Marconi 1043 Penney 1010, 1014 Pentax 1010, 1049 Perdio 1042 Philco 1004, 1051 Philips 1004, 1025, 1033, 1046, 1056, 1057, 1059, 1062, 1063 Philips Magnavox 1018 Phonola 1046 Pilot 1003 Pioneer 1011, 1046 Prinz 1042 Profex 1050 Profitronic 1014 Proline 1042 Proscan 1009 Prosonic 1044 Protec 1006 Pye 1046, 1056 Quarter 1001 Quartz 1001, 1047 Quasar 1004, 1035 Quelle 1042, 1046, 1047 Radio Shack 1003 Radio Shack/Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 Radiola 1046 Radix 1003 Randex 1003 RCA 1002, 1004, 1009, 1010, 1014, 1015, 1022, 1032 Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 Rex 1043 RFT 1046 Roadstar 1045, 1050, 1066 Saba 1043 Saisho 1044, 1050 Salora 1047 Samsung 1002, 1014, 1021, 1027, 1052, 1068, 1070 Sanky 1008 Sansui 1007, 1011, 1013, 1043 Sanyo 1001, 1002, 1014, 1047 SBR 1046 Schaub Lorenz 1042, 1043, 1047 Schneider 1042, 1044, 1045, 1046, 1050 Scott 1012 Sears 1001, 1003, 1004, 1010 SEG 1050 SEI-Sinudyne 1046 Seleco 1043 Sentron 1050 Sharp 1008, 1023, 1028, 1053, 1073 Shintom 1006, 1047, 1050 Shivaki 1045 Shogun 1002, 1014 Siemens 1045, 1047 Signature 2000 1008 Silva 1045 Singer 1004, 1006 Sinudyne 1046 Sontec 1045 Sony 1016, 1019, 1055, 1060, 1064, 1074 STS 1004, 1010 Sunkai 1044 © 2008 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. LEVEL 1, 99 QUEENSBRIDGE STREET, SOUTHBANK, VIC 3006, AUSTRALIA Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Sunstar Suntronic Sunwood Sylvania 1042 1042 1050 1004, 1005, 1031, 1041 Symphonic 1005 Taisho 1044 Tandy 1001 Tashiko 1003, 1042 Tatung 1007, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1066 TCM 1044, 1048 Teac 1005, 1007 Technics 1004, 1048 Teknika 1003, 1004, 1005 Teleavia 1043 Telefunken 1043 Tenosal 1050 Tensai 1042, 1045, 1050 Tevion 1044, 1048 Thomson 1043, 1058 Thorn 1043, 1047 TMK 1002, 1014 Tokai 1045, 1050 Tonsai 1050 Toshiba 1013, 1024, 1029, 1043, 1046, 1066, 1075 Totevision 1002, 1003, 1014 Towada 1050 Towika 1050 Uher 1045 Unitech 1002, 1014 Universum 1042, 1045, 1046 Vector Research 1000 Video Concepts 1000 Videon 1044, 1048 Videosonic 1002, 1014 Wards 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1014 Weltblick 1045 White Westinghouse 1013 XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006 Yamaha 1000, 1001, 1007 Yamishi 1050 Yokan 1050 Yoko 1045, 1050 Zenith 1013, 1026, 1037 All rights reserved. Printed in China WN25560 RX-V563 1046 1044 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043 KLH 1006 Kodak 1003, 1004 Korpel 1050 Leyco 1050 LG 1003, 1042, 1045, 1071 Lifetec 1044, 1048 Lloyd's 1005 Loewe 1048 Loewe Opta 1045, 1046 Logik 1006, 1050 Luxor 1047 LXI 1003 M Electronic 1042 Magnasonic 1047 Magnavox 1004, 1018, 1033 Magnin 1003, 1014 Manesth 1050 Marantz 1000, 1001, 1004, 1046, 1051 Marta 1003 Matsui 1044, 1045 Matsushita 1004 Mediator 1046 Medion 1044, 1048 MEI 1004 Memorex 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008, 1013, 1014, 1042, 1045, 1047 Memphis 1050 Metz 1048 MGA 1014 MGN Technology 1002, 1014 Micromaxx 1044, 1048 Microstar 1044, 1048 Migros 1042 Minolta 1010 Mitsubishi 1011, 1042, 1046 Montgomery Ward 1008 Motorola 1004, 1008 MTC 1002, 1014 Multitech 1002, 1005, 1006, 1042, 1046, 1050 Murphy 1042 RX-V563 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press CSYSTEM OFF to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are: Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz En 20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. 21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off by CSYSTEM OFF. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. This symbol mark is according to the EU directive 2002/96/EC. This symbol mark means that electrical and electronic equipment, at their endof-life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste. Please act according to your local rules and do not dispose of your old products with your normal household waste. Contents Features ................................................................... 2 Getting started ........................................................ 3 Quick start guide .................................................... 4 Displaying the Radio Data System information ...... 48 Selecting the Radio Data System program type (PTY SEEK mode) .............................................. 49 Using the enhanced other networks (EON) data service.................................................................. 50 Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player .......................................................51 Playback operation .................................................. 51 Using iPod™ ..........................................................53 Controlling iPod™................................................... 53 Using Bluetooth™ components............................55 PREPARATION Connections ............................................................. 9 Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 26 BASIC OPERATION Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 30 Playback ................................................................ 35 Sound field programs ........................................... 40 Sound field program descriptions............................ 40 Using audio features ............................................. 43 Enjoying high quality sound.................................... 43 Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 43 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 43 Selecting the night listening mode........................... 44 FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 45 Remote control features........................................71 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 71 Setting remote control codes ................................... 73 Using multi-zone configuration............................74 Connecting Zone 2................................................... 74 Controlling Zone 2................................................... 75 Advanced setup......................................................77 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Troubleshooting.....................................................78 Glossary..................................................................88 Specifications .........................................................91 Index .......................................................................92 APPENDIX (at the end of this manual) Front panel................................................................i Remote control ....................................................... ii List of remote control codes ................................. iii About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “MSPEAKERS” or “3DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. • The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding reference page(s). English Automatic tuning ..................................................... 45 Manual tuning.......................................................... 45 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 46 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 46 Selecting preset stations........................................... 47 Exchanging preset station ........................................ 47 Using SET MENU................................................... 58 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 59 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 65 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 67 APPENDIX Basic operations....................................................... 35 Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT).............................................. 36 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 36 Displaying the current status of this unit on a video monitor............................................... 37 Using your headphones............................................ 37 Muting the audio output........................................... 37 Playing video sources in the background of an audio source................................................ 38 Displaying the input source information ................. 38 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 39 SET MENU ............................................................57 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 30 Creating your original SCENE templates................ 33 Using remote control on the SCENE feature........... 34 ADVANCED OPERATION ADVANCED OPERATION Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room .................................... 26 Recording ...............................................................56 BASIC OPERATION Rear panel .................................................................. 9 Placing speakers....................................................... 10 Connecting speakers ................................................ 11 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13 Information on HDMI™.......................................... 14 Audio and video signal flow.................................... 15 Connecting video components................................. 16 Connecting other components ................................. 17 Connecting audio components................................. 19 Connecting a Yamaha iPod™ universal dock or Bluetooth™ adapter............................................. 20 Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks............................... 20 Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 21 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 21 Connecting the power cable..................................... 22 Turning on and off the power .................................. 23 Front panel display .................................................. 24 Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your Bluetooth™ component....................................... 55 Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 55 PREPARATION Preparation: Check the items ..................................... 4 Step 1: Set up your speakers...................................... 5 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components............................................................ 6 Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button................................... 7 What do you want to do with this unit?..................... 8 Radio Data System tuning (Europe and Russia models only) ....................48 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 1 En Features Features Built-in 7-channel power amplifier DOCK terminal ◆ Minimum RMS output power [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) 90 W/ch [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) 90 W/ch ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately). SCENE select function ◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations ◆ SCENE template customizing capability Decoders and DSP circuits ◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of multi-channel surround sound ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix, Discrete, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Radio tuners ◆ FM/AM tuning capability ◆ Radio Data System capability (Europe model only) HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) USB features ◆ USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player ◆ MP3, WMA and WAV capability Other features ◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ DIRECT mode for high quality sound for all sources ◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ Component video input/output capability (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ iPod controlling capability ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes ◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility ◆ Bi-amplification connection capability ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS-ES | NEO:6 | 96/24. Product “DTS” and “DTS-ES | NEO:6” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. “96/24” is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Bluetooth™ “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. iPod™ “iPod” is a trademark of Apple, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. 2 En “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. Getting started Getting started ■ Installing batteries in the remote control Check that you received all of the following parts. ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ 1 Remote control Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) Optimizer microphone AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna 3 INTRODUCTION ■ Supplied accessories 2 ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) Caution The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are as follows: Asia model ................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ...................... 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. Notes VOLTAGE SELECTOR 230240V Voltage indication • Change all of the batteries if you notice that the operation range of the remote control decreases. • Do not use an old battery and a new one together. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control code. English 3 En Quick start guide Quick start guide The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. Video monitor Front right speaker Front left speaker Prepare the following items. Subwoofer Surround right speaker Center speaker Surround back right speaker DVD player Surround back left speaker Surround left speaker ❏ Speakers ❏ Front speaker .....................................x 2 ❏ Center speaker ...................................x 1 ❏ Surround speaker ..............................x 4 Select magnetically shielded speakers. The minimum required speakers are two front speakers. The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows: 1. Two surround speakers 2. Center speaker 3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s) ❏ Active subwoofer ...................................x 1 Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA input jack. Step 1: Set up your speakers ☞ P. 5 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components ☞ P. 6 Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button ☞ P. 7 Enjoy DVD playback! 4 En Preparation: Check the items ❏ Speaker cable .........................................x 7 ❏ Subwoofer cable .....................................x 1 Select a monaural RCA cable. ❏ DVD player ..............................................x 1 Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital audio output jack and composite video output jack. ❏ Video monitor ..........................................x 1 Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped with a composite video input jack. ❏ Video cable .............................................x 2 Select an RCA composite video cable. ❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ....................x 1 Quick start guide Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. Step 1: Set up your speakers Front and center speakers Loosen Insert INTRODUCTION Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. Tighten SPEAKERS COAXIAL DVD IN1 DTV/CBL IN2 1 OUT HDMI REMOTE DVD 4 OPTICAL DVD DTV/CBL MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DIGITAL 2 3 OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y PR PB DOCK ANTENNA DTV/CBL Y IN AM DVR SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP OUT GND R R SURROUND L L SINGLE +12V 15mA MAX. VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT FM AC OUTLETS 75 UNBAL. TRIGGER OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT L DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT SWITCHED MONITOR S VIDEO OUT L CENTER R SUB WOOFER R IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) IN DVD DTV/CBL FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) OUT DVR CD AUDIO CENTER SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT ZONE 2 OUT R FRONT A L R FRONT B L OUTPUT 1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the room. 2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker. To the center speaker To the front right speaker To the front left speaker Surround and surround back speakers Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 3 Connect each speaker cable to the corresponding speaker terminal of this unit. 1 2 3 To the surround back right speaker 4 To the surround back left speaker 1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables together to prevent short circuits. 3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other. 4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal part of this unit. 4 To the surround right speaker To the surround left speaker Connect the subwoofer cable to the input jack of the subwoofer and the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack of this unit. Subwoofer AV receiver Subwoofer cable 5 En English SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack Input jack Quick start guide Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components 3 SPEAKERS COAXIAL 1 OUT HDMI DVD PB AV receiver MD/CD-R CD CD DIGITAL 2 3 OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PR Video monitor 4 OPTICAL OPTICAL DTV/CBL DTV/CBL DVD DTV/CBL IN2 DVD IN1 REMOTE Connect the video cable to the video input jack of your video monitor and the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. Y PR DOCK PB ANTENNA DTV/CBL Y IN AM DVR SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP OUT GND R R SURROUND L L SINGLE +12V 15mA MAX. MONITOR OUT VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO FM AC OUTLETS 75 UNBAL. TRIGGER OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT L DVD DTV/CBL DTV/CBL IN IN OUT DVR DVR OUT SWITCHED MONITOR MONITOR SS VIDEO VIDEO OUT OUT L CENTER R SUB WOOFER R IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) IN DVD DTV/CBL OUT CD DVR FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) AUDIO CENTER SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT ZONE 2 OUT R FRONT A L R FRONT B L OUTPUT Make sure that this unit and the DVD player are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack of this unit. DVD player AV receiver Video input jack Video cable 4 VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack Connect the power plug of this unit and other components into the AC wall outlet. y This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) for the power supply of the other components (except Korea model). See page 22 for details. ■ For further connections • Using the other kind of speaker combinations Digital coaxial audio output jack Digital coaxial audio cable 2 DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack Connect the video cable to the composite video output jack of your DVD player and the DVD VIDEO jack of this unit. • Connecting video components ☞ P. 16 • Connecting a DVD player ☞ P. 17 • Connecting a DVD recorder ☞ P. 18 • Connecting a set-top box ☞ P. 18 • Connecting a CD player and a CD recorder/MD recorder ☞ P. 19 • Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder ☞ P. 19 • Connecting a Yamaha iPod/Bluetooth dock ☞ P. 20 • Connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ☞ P. 20 • Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel ☞ P. 21 • Connecting an FM/AM antenna DVD player Composite video output jack 6 En Video cable AV receiver DVD VIDEO jack ☞ P. 11 ☞ P. 21 • Using the USB jack on the front panel ☞ P. 51 Quick start guide Step 3: Press SCENE 1 button Turn on the video monitor and then set the input source selector of the video monitor to this unit. 2 Press T SCENE 1. This unit is turned on. “DVD Viewing” appears in the front panel display, and this unit automatically optimize own status for the DVD playback. Just by pressing one SCENE button, you can turn on this unit and recall your favorite input source and sound field program according to the SCENE template that has been assigned to the SCENE button. The SCENE templates are built combinations of input sources and sound field programs. y If you connect a Yamaha product that has capability of the SCENE control signals, this unit can automatically activate the component and start playback. Refer to the instruction manual of the DVD player for further information. ■ Using the other SCENE buttons Default SCENE button y The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while this unit is in the SCENE mode. 3 Start playback of the desired DVD on your player. 4 Rotate LVOLUME to adjust the volume. INTRODUCTION 1 ■ About SCENE function The name of the SCENE template and its description SCENE 1 DVD Movie Viewing – input source: DVD – sound field program: Movie Dramatic For when you want to enjoy a movie from the connected DVD player. SCENE 2 Music Disc Listening – input source: DVD – sound field program: 2ch Stereo For when you want to listen to a music disc from the connected DVD player. SCENE 3 TV Viewing *1 – input source: DTV/CBL – sound field program: STRAIGHT For when you want to watch a TV program. SCENE 4 Radio Listening *2, *3, *4 – input source: TUNER – sound field program: 7ch Enhancer For when you want to listen to a music program from the FM radio station. Notes *1 You must connect a cable TV or a satellite tuner to this unit in advance. See page 16 for details. *2 You need to connect the supplied FM and AM antennas to this unit in advance. See page 21 for details. *3 You must tune into the desired radio station. See pages 45 to 47 for the tuning information. *4 To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM antenna. y Note English When you change the input source or sound field program, the SCENE mode is deactivated, and the indicator on the selected SCENE button turns off. If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See page 30 for details. 7 En Quick start guide ■ After using this unit... Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. What do you want to do with this unit? ■ Customizing the SCENE templates • Using various SCENE templates ☞ P. 30 • Creating your original SCENE templates ☞ P. 33 ■ Using various input sources This unit is set to the standby mode. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby mode, press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or GPOWER). See page 23 for details. • Basic controls of this unit ☞ P. 35 • Enjoying FM/AM radio programs ☞ P. 45 • Using your USB portable device with this unit ☞ P. 51 • Using your iPod with this unit ☞ P. 53 • Using your Bluetooth components with this unit ☞ P. 55 ■ Using various sound features • Using various sound field programs ☞ P. 40 • Using the direct mode for the high quality sound ☞ P. 43 • Customizing the sound field programs ☞ P. 42 ■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit • Automatically optimizing the speaker parameters for your listening room (AUTO SETUP) ☞ P. 26 • Manually adjusting various parameters of this unit ☞ P. 57 • Setting the remote control ☞ P. 71 • Adjusting the advanced parameters ☞ P. 77 ■ Additional features Automatically turning off this unit 8 En ☞ P. 39 Connections Connections Rear panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SPEAKERS DTV/CBL MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DIGITAL 2 3 OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO 1 OUT 4 OPTICAL DVD DTV/CBL IN2 DVD IN1 HDMI REMOTE DVD PB PR PREPARATION COAXIAL Y PR DOCK PB ANTENNA DTV/CBL Y IN AM DVR SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP OUT GND R R SURROUND L L SINGLE +12V 15mA MAX. VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT FM AC OUTLETS 75 UNBAL. TRIGGER OUT DVD IN DTV/CBL DVR OUT MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL L L R R IN DVR OUT SWITCHED MONITOR S VIDEO OUT CENTER IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) DTV/CBL DVR CD AUDIO 89 SUB WOOFER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) OUT IN DVD MULTI CH INPUT 0 A B Name CENTER SUB WOOFER ZONE 2 OUT R FRONT A L R FRONT B L OUTPUT C D E F Page 1 HDMI jacks 14 2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks 13 3 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack 13 4 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks 13 5 DOCK terminal 20 6 Speaker terminals 11 7 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) 3 8 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks 20 9 TRIGGER OUT jack — This is a control expansion jack for custom installation. 0 AUDIO jacks 13 A VIDEO jacks 13 B MULTI CH INPUT jacks 19 C ZONE 2 OUT jacks 74 D SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack 11 E ANTENNA terminals 21 F AC OUTLET(S) 22 English 9 En Connections Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. C FR FL FR SW FL 30˚ SR C SL SR SL 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SBR SR SBR SBL 30 cm (12 in) or more Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. 10 En Connections Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately. When you use single surround back speaker, connect the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK terminal (SINGLE). Surround back speakers Right Left PREPARATION Caution • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the AC power plug is disconnected from the AC wall outlet. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display when you turn on this unit. • Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. Surround speakers Right Left SPEAKERS COAXIAL DVD DVD IN1 DTV/CBL IN2 1 OUT HDMI REMOTE DVD 4 OPTICAL DTV/CBL MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DIGITAL 2 3 OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PB PR Y PR PB DOCK ANTENNA DTV/CBL Y IN AM DVR SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP OUT GND R R SURROUND L L SINGLE +12V 15mA MAX. VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT FM AC OUTLETS 75 UNBAL. TRIGGER OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL L L R R IN DVR OUT SWITCHED MONITOR S VIDEO OUT CENTER IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) OUT IN DVD DTV/CBL AUDIO DVR CD SUB WOOFER FRONT(6CH) SB(8CH) SURROUND CENTER SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT ZONE 2 OUT R FRONT A L R FRONT B L OUTPUT FRONT B terminals Connect the alternative front speaker system (FRONT B). Center speaker Subwoofer Left Right Front speakers (FRONT A) English 11 En Connections ■ Before connecting to the SPEAKERS terminal A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the bare wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. ■ Using bi-amplification connections Caution Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers. This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-amplification. To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in “Advanced setup” (see page 77). 10 mm (3/8”) Front speakers Right Left ■ Connecting to the FRONT A terminals 2 1 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 R FRONT A L SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP R L SINGLE 1 Loosen the knob. 2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into the hole on the terminal. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. This unit Notes Connecting the banana plug (except Europe, Russia, Korea, and Asia models) The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug 12 En • When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the shorting bars are put into the terminals appropriately. Refer to the instruction manuals of the speakers for details. • When you use bi-amplification connections, you can not use surround back speakers. Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs Connect one of the type of the audio jack(s) and/or video jack(s) that your input components are equipped with. Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL AUDIO R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R C AUDIO Left and right analog audio cable plugs Coaxial digital audio cable plug VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y S VIDEO (Yellow) (Red) O V S Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug S-video cable plug (Blue) (Green) PB PR Y Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jack For digital audio signals transmitted via a coaxial digital audio cable. DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. PREPARATION DIGITAL AUDIO L Video jacks and cable plugs S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. Notes • You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. Optical input jacks are compatible with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency. • This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input at the digital jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT Output (MONITOR OUT) Input COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y PR PB Y S VIDEO VIDEO Through Video conversion ON (see page 67) The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT (REC) jacks. 13 En English Note Connections Information on HDMI™ ■ HDMI compatibility with this unit Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible HDMI components 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following standards: • HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC. • HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 38). 14 En ■ HDMI jack and cable plug HDMI HDMI cable plug y • We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. Notes • Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. • Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN DVD or HDMI IN DTV/CBL jack of this unit cannot be digitally output at the HDMI OUT jack. • If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to establish the connection to the component. Connections Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow Input ■ Video signal flow Output Input Output HDMI HDMI DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) PREPARATION COMPONENT VIDEO AUDIO S VIDEO Digital output VIDEO Through Analog output Video conversion ON (see page 67) Notes • 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at the HDMI IN DVD or HDMI IN DTV/CBL jack can be output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “Other” (see page 64). • Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the AUDIO output and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. Notes • When the all video signals are input at the HDMI, COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as follows: 1. HDMI 2. COMPONENT VIDEO 3. S VIDEO 4. VIDEO • When some digital video signals are input at the HDMI IN DVD or HDMI IN DTV/CBL jack, the video conversion function does not work. • Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN DVD or HDMI IN DTV/CBL jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks. English 15 En Connections Connecting video components Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. Notes • Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly. • When you connect your TV monitor or projector via HDMI connection, the OSD does not appear. In such cases, connect the TV monitor or projector via component, S-video or video connection. • Connect the input source components to the HDMI IN DVD or HDMI IN DTV/CBL jack to display the video images on the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. y You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals (see page 64). COAXIAL DVD VD IN1 DTV/CBL IN2 1 OUT HDMI OTE DVD 4 OPTICAL DTV/CBL MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DIGITAL 2 3 OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PB PR Y PR PB DTV/CBL Y DVR MAX. VIDEO VIDEO GER UT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN MONITOR S VIDEO OUT DVR OUT L CENTER R D/ OUT -R (REC) IN DVD DTV/CBL CD AUDIO PB ZONE 2 OUT Y Component video in S V Video in S-video in TV (or projector) indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections (One for the video connection, and one for the audio connection) 16 En SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT PR HDMI in WO FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) OUT DVR OUTPUT Connections Connecting other components Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Notes • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 67), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 16). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks. ■ Connecting a DVD player PREPARATION • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 67), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. To record a source, make the same type of video connections between each component. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to DIGITAL INPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL IN” or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 65). • If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. DVD player S-video out HDMI out Component video out Coaxial out Audio out Video out R V L PR C COAXIAL DTV/CBL IN2 1 OUT HDMI DVD DTV/CBL MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DIGITAL 2 3 OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PB PR S Y 4 OPTICAL DVD DVD IN1 REMOTE PB Y PR PB DTV/CBL Y IN DVR OUT +12V 15mA MAX. VIDEO VIDEO TRIGGER OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL L L R R IN DVR OUT MONITOR S VIDEO OUT CENTER IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) IN DVD DTV/CBL AUDIO OUT DVR CD WO FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT ZONE 2 OUT OUTPUT indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections (One for the video connection, and one for the audio connection) English 17 En Connections ■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR DVD DVD IN1 DTV/CBL IN2 DTV/CBL MD/CD R MD/CD-R DIGITAL 2 3 OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO 1 OUT HDMI REMOTE DVD PB PR Y PR DTV/CBL Y PB IN DVR OUT +12V 15mA MAX. VIDEO VIDEO TRIGGER OUT MONITOR OUT DVD IN DTV/CBL DVR OUT MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL L L R R IN DVR OUT MONITOR S VIDEO OUT CENTER IN IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) DVD DTV/CBL WO FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) OUT CD DVR AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT MULTI CH INPUT L S OUTPUT S-video in R Video in Audio in Audio out L R S-video out S V V SUB WOOFER PR PB Y Component video out Video out DVD recorder, PVR or VCR ■ Connecting a set-top box Satellite receiver, cable TV receiver or HDTV decoder HDMI out Component video out R Optical out S-video out Audio out Video out L V S O PR COAXIAL 1 OUT HDMI DVD DTV/CBL MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DIGITAL 2 3 OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PB PR Y 4 OPTICAL DVD DTV/CBL IN2 DVD IN1 REMOTE PB PB PR Y DTV/CBL Y IN DVR OUT +12V 15mA MAX. VIDEO VIDEO TRIGGER OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT L DTV/CBL DVD IN DVR OUT MONITOR S VIDEO OUT indicates recommended connections L CENTER R R IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) IN DVD DTV/CBL AUDIO 18 En OUT DVR CD WO FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) SUB WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT ZONE 2 OUT OUTPUT indicates alternative connections (One for the video connection, and one for the audio connection) Connections Connecting audio components Connect the audio components as follows. Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. ■ Connecting a CD player and a CD recorder/MD recorder Notes • When you connect your CD player via analog and digital connection, priority is given to the signal input at the DIGITAL INPUT jack. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT jack, select the corresponding setting in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 65). indicates recommended connections COAXIAL DTV/CBL IN2 CD DTV/CBL MD/CD-R DIGITAL 3 2 OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO 1 OUT HDMI REMOTE 4 OPTICAL DVD DVD IN1 PREPARATION indicates alternative connections DVD PB PR Y PR P IN Optical in O OUT L +12V 15mA MAX. R O MONITOR OUT VIDEO VIDEO Optical out Audio in TRIGGER OUT L DVD DTV/CBL IN MONITOR OUT DVR OUT DVD IN DTV/CBL L L R R DVR OUT L CENTER R R CD recorder or MD recorder Audio out IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) IN DVD DTV/CBL FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) OUT CD DVR AUDIO SUB WOOFER Audio out CD player MULTI CH INPUT ■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. If you set “INPUT CH” to “8ch” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 67), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 67) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. Notes • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 36), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. CENTER CENTER L L L R R *1 R SURROUND WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT R L R L R Multi-format player/External decoder (7.1-channel output) The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 67). 19 En English *1 Center out Front out Center out Multi-format player/External decoder (5.1-channel output) Subwoofer out L Surround out R Surround back out L Subwoofer out Front out Surround out R SURROUND WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT SB(8CH) SB(8CH) L SUB FRONT(6CH) SUB FRONT(6CH) Connections Connecting a Yamaha iPod™ universal dock or Bluetooth™ adapter Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks When the components are the Yamaha products and have the capability of the transmission of the remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN jack and REMOTE OUT jack to the remote control input and output jack with the monaural analog mini cable as follows. DVD IN1 REMOTE IN OUT This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately). Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth adapter to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. +12V 15mA MAX. Remote control out Infrared signal receiver or Yamaha component DOCK DTV/CBL Y ANTENNA DVR AM SURROUND BAC GND Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth adapter 20 En R Remote control in Yamaha component (CD or DVD player, etc.) y • If the components have the capability of the SCENE control signals, this unit can automatically activate the corresponding components and start the playback when you use one of the SCENE buttons. Refer to the owner’s manuals for details about the capability of the SCENE control signals of the components. • If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not the Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the advanced setup menu to “OFF” (see page 77). Connections Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. Caution Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. y See page 22 for connection information of the supplied AM loop antenna. • To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. • When audio signals are input at the AUDIO jacks and the DOCK terminal on the rear panel, the priority order of the input signal is as follows: 1. DOCK 2. AUDIO Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. PREPARATION Notes VOLUME Outdoor AM antenna MAIN ZONE ON/OFF OPTIMIZER MIC SYSTEM OFF ZONE 2 ON/OFF EDIT PRESET/TUNING BAND l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L ZONE CONTROL SCENE 1 l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF PROGRAM 2 3 STRAIGHT DIRECT h TONE CONTROL 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO USB R Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft) vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. AM loop antenna (supplied) EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Indoor FM antenna (supplied) VIDEO AUX VIDEO L AUDIO R DOCK ANTENNA AM V Video output L R GND Audio output FM 75 UNBAL. O SUB WOOFER CENTER PUT Game console or video camera Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. English 21 En Connections Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna Open the lever Insert Close the lever Connecting the power cable Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet. y The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal. AC OUTLETS SWITCHED Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna Power cable ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) Note The types of the supplied AM loop antenna is different depending on the models. 22 En Australia model...................................................... 1 outlet Korea model............................................................... None Other models......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is set to the standby mode. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see “Specifications” on page 91. Connections Turning on and off the power ■ Turning on this unit Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or G POWER) to turn on this unit. y When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. PREPARATION ■ Set this unit to the standby mode Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or H STANDBY) to set this unit to the standby mode. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. y You can set the main zone and zone 2 to the standby mode simultaneously by pressing CSYSTEM OFF. English 23 En Connections Front panel display 1 2 DVR MULTI CH USB 3 V-AUX DOCK q EX q DIGITAL PLUS 96 ES 24 q PL x MATRIX DISCRETE SP AB 4 DTV/CBL DVD 5 MD/CD-R ENHANCER 6 CD 7 TUNER VOL. YPAO MEMORY VIRTUAL AUTO TUNED STEREO MUTE dB SLEEP PTY HOLD PS PTY RT CT EON 96/24 LFE ZONE 2 SILENT CINEMA ft ms dB PCM 9 8 0 A BC D E F G L C R SL SB SR SBL SBR H 1 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at the HDMI IN jacks (see page 14). 6 Tuner indicators Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode (see pages 45 to 47). 2 DOCK indicator • Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 20) and V-AUX is selected as the input source. • Flashes while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth component is in the paring (see page 55) or the Bluetooth adapter is searching the Bluetooth component (see page 55). • Lights up while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter is connected to the Bluetooth component (see page 20). 7 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. 3 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is selected (see page 40). 4 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 5 YPAO indicator Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without any modifications (see page 26). 24 En 8 MUTE indicator and VOLUME level indicator • The MUTE indicator flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 37). • Indicates the current volume level. 9 PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. 0 Decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this unit function. A Headphone indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 37). B SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers activated (see page 35). SP A: The FRONT A speakers are activated. SP B: The FRONT B speakers are activated. C ZONE2 indicator Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 75). Connections D CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a sound field program (see page 41). ■ Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 41). SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 41). 30º 30º F SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 39). G Radio Data System indicators (Europe and Russia models only) PTY HOLD Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. y PS, PTY, RT and CT Light up according to the selected Radio Data System display mode. To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 73. EON Lights up when the EON data service is being received. • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places H Input channel and speaker indicators LFE L C R SL SB SR SBL SBR LFE indicator PREPARATION Approximately 6 m (20 ft) E Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. Notes Input channel indicators Input channel indicators • Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. • Light up or flash according to the settings of the speakers when this unit is in the automatic setup procedure (see page 26) or the speaker level setting procedure in the “SP LEVEL” (see page 61). English 25 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Using AUTO SETUP 2 Notes Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. OPTIMIZER MIC • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. O/MAN'L ZONE CONTROL VIDEO AUX AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO USB R y You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 1 Optimizer microphone Make sure of the following check points. The following display appears in the OSD. Note AUTO SETUP Before starting the automatic setup, check the following check points. ❏ SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO . START Automatic Processing of all item [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Start 3 p ❏ Speakers are connected appropriately. Headphones are disconnected from this unit. This unit and the video monitor are turned on. This unit is selected as the video input source of the video monitor. The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume level is set to about half way (or slightly less). The crossover frequency controls of the connected subwoofer is set to the maximum. p ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the microphone heading upward. Optimizer microphone VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER HIGH CUT MIN MAX Controls of a subwoofer (example) ❏ ❏ FRONT A speakers are selected as the front speaker system (see page 35). The room is sufficiently quiet. y It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.). 26 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room 4 Make sure that “SETUP” is set to “AUTO” and the pointer is pointing at “START”. y You can also select the following setup methods. In this case, press 7 k to select “SETUP”, press 7 l / h to select the one of the following choises and then select “START”. Note “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results. 5 Press 7 n to select “START” and then press 7 ENTER to start the setup procedure. The following message appears in the OSD. NOTICE Loudtesttonesare output. Pleasekeepquiet orleavetheroom. Press 7 ENTER to start the setup procedure. This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the auto setup procedure. Once all items are set, the result display appears in the OSD. Notes • During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. • We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure. This unit performs the following checks: PREPARATION Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT • Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and override the previous settings. • Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and restore the previous settings. • Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP” parameters to the initial factory settings. 6 Speaker wiring/volume level WIRING/LEVEL Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Also checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker. Speaker distance DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Speaker size SIZE Checks the frequency response of each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each channel. Press[ENTER] Before proceeding next operation Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the automatic setup procedure. For more accurate measurements, keep quiet and move to the wall where speakers are not around. We recommend that you leave the listening room during the automatic setup procedure. English 27 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room The display changes as follows. 7 Press 8 k and 8 ENTER to display the setup results in detail. 8 Press 8 l / h repeatedly to toggle between the setup result displays. AUTO SETUP SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO . START p p Automatic Processing of all item [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Start Results of the speaker connection and wiring AUTO SETUP Results of the speaker distance from the listening position INITIALIZING . WIRING/LEVEL DISTANCE SIZE [ WAITING;;; ;;;;;;;;;; []:Exit Results of the speaker size AUTO SETUP RESULT SP : 3/2/0.1 DIST: 3.2/3.5m LVL : -2/+2dB . >SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Results of the speaker output level y If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 57). The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows. Number of speakers SP Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Front/Back/Subwoofer Speaker distance DIST Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance Speaker level LVL Displays the speaker output level in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level Notes • If “E-9:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing procedure, restart from step 4. • If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are output. • If an error occurs during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on page 29. • When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the number of warning messages appears (see page 29). 28 En Note The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your speakers. 9 Press 8 ENTER to return to the result display. AUTO SETUP . RESULT SP : 3/2/0.1 DIST: 3.2/3.5m LVL : -2/+2dB CANCEL >SET [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Detail Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room 10 11 Press 7 n and then press 7 l / h to select “SET” or “CANCEL”. Choices: SET, CANCEL • Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP” results. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP” results. Press 7 ENTER to confirm your selection. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. ■ If “WARNING” appears When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the result display. Check the warning messages to correct your speaker settings. Note Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 1 TOP MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter PREPARATION SET MENU Make sure the pointer is pointing at “WARNING” and then press 7 ENTER to display the detailed information about the warning. The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates the number of warning messages. 12 Press K MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. 13 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from this unit. The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit. AUTO SETUP . WARNING(2) RESULT SP : 3/2/0.1 DIST: 3.2/3.5m LVL : -2/+2dB CANCEL >SET [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Detail 2 Press 7 l / h repeatedly to toggle between the warning displays. y WARNING If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate your system. W-1:OUT OF PHASE Reverse channel AAAAFLAAAAA--AAACENTER AAAASLAAAAA--AAAASBLAAAA--- ■ If an error screen appears [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return Press 7 k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or “EXIT” and then press 7 ENTER. The following display is an example where “E-8:USER CANCEL” appears in the OSD. y • For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 82. • When the corresponding warning message is not applicable to a speaker, “– – –” is displayed instead. ERROR . E-8:USER CANCEL Can't detect signal at MIC >RETRY 3 Press 7 ENTER to return to the result display. EXIT [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Enter Choices: RETRY, EXIT • Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. English 29 En SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES Selecting the SCENE templates This unit is equipped with 16 preset SCENE templates for various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to each SCENE button: 2 Press RINPUT l / h (or press 4AMP and then press 7l / h) to select the desired template. SCENE 1: DVD Movie Viewing SCENE 2: Music Disc Listening SCENE 3: TV Viewing SCENE 4: Radio Listening l INPUT h Front panel If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE buttons on the front panel and the remote control. or AMP ENTER Select the desired SCENE template Remote control 1 Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button SCENE template library (Image) Selecting the desired SCENE template DVD Viewing 3 Press the TSCENE (or 5SCENE) button again to confirm the selection. The selected SCENE template is assigned to the button. 1 1 Press and hold the desired TSCENE (or 5SCENE) button for 3 seconds. The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the front panel starts to flash, and the name of the currently assigned SCENE template appears in the front panel display. 3 seconds 3 seconds or 1 Front panel 1 Remote control 1 Flashes DVD MovieView 30 En Front panel or 1 Remote control Note Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 34 for details. Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Which SCENE template would you like to select? Which source do you like to play back? Video sources (DVD video, Recorded video) Which component do you like for playback? DVD SCENE templates Default SCENE buttons DVD Viewing DVD Movie Viewing 1 DVD Live Viewing Music discs (CD, SACD or DVD-Audio) DVR DVR Viewing DVD Disc Hi-fi Listening Music Disc Listening 2 Disc Listening CD CD Hi-fi Listening BASIC OPERATION CD Listening CD Music Listening Radio programs TUNER (FM/AM) Radio Listening iPod or Bluetooth component DOCK Dock Listening USB memory device or USB portable audio player USB USB Audio Listening TV programs DTV/CBL TV Viewing 4 3 TV Sports Viewing Video games V-AUX* Game Playing Note * When iPod is connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock or a Bluetooth component is connected to the Bluetooth adapter, this unit plays back the audio sources input at the DOCK terminal. y You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 33 for details. English 31 En Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons in the default setting. SCENE template Input source Playback mode Features DVD Viewing DVD* STRAIGHT DVD Movie Viewing DVD* MOVIE Movie Dramatic Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your DVD player. DVD Live Viewing DVD* MUSIC Pop/Rock Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live video on your DVD player. DVR Viewing DVR MOVIE Movie Dramatic Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your digital video recorder. Disc Hi-fi Listening DVD* DIRECT Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity sound of the music discs on your DVD player. Music Disc Listening DVD* STEREO 2ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your DVD player. Disc Listening DVD* STEREO 7ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you play back music sources on your DVD player as the background music. CD Hi-fi Listening CD* DIRECT Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity sound of the music discs on your CD player. CD Listening CD* STEREO 7ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your CD player as the background music. CD Music Listening CD* STEREO 2ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you play back music source on your CD player. Radio Listening TUNER MUSIC ENHANCER Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio programs. 7ch Enhancer DOCK MUSIC ENHANCER Select this SCENE template when you play back music on your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock or 7ch Enhancer Select this SCENE template when you play back general contents on the DVD player. 1 2 4 1 Dock Listening Bluetooth component that is connected to the Bluetooth adapter. USB Audio Listening USB TV Viewing DTV/CBL STRAIGHT TV Sports Viewing DTV/CBL ENTERTAINMENT TV Sports Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs on your TV. Game Playing V-AUX ENTERTAINMENT Game Select this SCENE template when you play video games. MUSIC ENHANCER Select this SCENE template when you play back music on your USB memory device or a USB portable audio player. 7ch Enhancer Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general programs on your TV. 3 1 * When the connected DVD player or CD player has the capability of the SCENE control signals and is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, this unit operates the DVD player or CD player worked with the SCENE features. 32 En Selecting the SCENE templates Creating your original SCENE templates 3 You can create your original SCENE templates for each SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 16 SCENE templates to create the original SCENE templates. ■ Customizing the preset SCENE templates • INPUT: • MODE: Create the original SCENE template SCENE : DVD Viewing SCENE : DVD Viewing INPUT : DVD SCENE template library (Image) 4 Press the 5SCENE button again to confirm the edit. 1 BASIC OPERATION The input source component The active sound field programs, STRAIGHT or DIRECT mode (see pages 41 and 43) • NIGHT: The night listening mode setting (see page 44) − SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening mode. − CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the CINEMA mode. − MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the MUSIC mode. Use this feature to customize the preset SCENE templates. Select a SCENE template Press 4AMP and then 7 k / n to select the desired parameter of the SCENE template and then 7 l / h to select the desired value of the selected parameter. You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE template: 1 Assign to the SCENE button y 1 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press and hold the desired 5SCENE button for 3 seconds. The SCENE template customizing screen appears on the video monitor. AMP 1 3 seconds Note When the SCENE template you want to customize is not assigned to any of the 5SCENE buttons, press 4AMP and then press 7l / h repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the menu screen. An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE template. Notes • Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding 5SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 34 for details. • You can create a customized SCENE template for each 5SCENE button, and if you create another customized SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with the new one. • The newly created template is only available for the assigned 5SCENE button. ■ Renaming the SCENE templates 33 En English Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3 of “Customizing the preset SCENE templates” and then press 7ENTER. • Press 7k / n to select the desired character. • Press 7l / h to place “_” (underscore) under the space or the desired character. • Press 8RETURN to cancel the new name. • Press 7ENTER to confirm the new name. Selecting the SCENE templates Using remote control on the SCENE feature ■ Controlling the input source components in the SCENE mode ■ Setting input source of the customized SCENE template on the remote control You can operate both this unit and the input source component by using the remote control. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 73). If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE template, you must set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control to operate the input source component correctly. 1 Press the desired 5SCENE button on the remote control. Press and hold the 5SCENE button and the desired input selector button (3) for 3 seconds. 2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below to control the input source component of the selected SCENE template. y * POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV USB A B MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK C B D C AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 TV CH TV VOL SCENE 3 4 SCENE buttons SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU BAND LEVEL TITLE ENTER DISPLAY RETURN MEMORY REC FREQ/TEXT EON MODE - PTY SEEK - START l PROG h 1 2 3 4 STRAIGHT DIRECT NIGHT PARAMETER 5 6 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT Note * These buttons control the input source component. See page 72 for details of the function of each button. 34 En Press the 5SCENE button again to operate the input source component. PLAYBACK Playback Caution Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. Basic operations 1 3 Rotate LVOLUME (or press LVOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. 6 Press OPROGRAM l / h repeatedly (or press 4AMP and then APROG l / h repeatedly) to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. See page 40 for details about sound field programs. Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press MSPEAKERS repeatedly to select the front speakers you want to use. The respective speaker indicators lights up in the front panel display. Press RINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons (3)) to select the desired input source. The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display for a few seconds. Available input sources MULTI CH DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R CD TUNER USB INPUT:DVD Currently selected input source Movie Dramatic Currently selected surround field program Notes • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 36). • When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 41). • To display information about the currently selected input source in the OSD, see page 38 for details. ■ A quick guide to contents When you want to... 4 Start playback on the selected component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 45 for details about FM/AM tuning instructions. BASIC OPERATION 2 5 See page Enjoy high quality sound 43 Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 43 Adjust the parameters of sound field programs 42 Enjoy the sources with a wide dynamic range at night 44 Use headphones 37 Select a decoder to play back sources with 41 Automatically set this unit to the standby mode 39 English 35 En Playback Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to as the same input source. Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 19) as the input source. y Press RINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press 4AMP and then DMULTI CH IN) to select MULTI CH. “MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display. • We recommend setting the audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 68). y Press SAUDIO SELECT (or press 4AMP and then EAUDIO SEL) repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack select setting. Available input sources MULTI CH DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R CD TUNER USB A.SEL:AUTO Currently selected audio input jack select setting AUDIO SELECT Function AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) HDMI (2) Digital signals (3) Analog signals HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not input, no sound is output. COAX/OPT Selects only digital signals. When no signals are input, no sound is output. ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Note This feature is not available when no digital input jacks (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition, HDMI is not available as an audio input jack select setting when the HDMI IN DVD and HDMI IN DTV/CBL jacks are not used. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see page 65). 36 En Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 67). Note The input signals are amplified and output directly without sound processing. Therefore, you cannot activate sound field programs, the night listening mode, etc. while MULTI CH is selected as the input source. Playback Displaying the current status of this unit on a video monitor You can display the operating information of this unit on a video monitor. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press MDISPLAY. The current status screen appears in the OSD. Using your headphones Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. y You can select the amount of time that the current status is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 68). y Note Notes The OSD signal is not output at the DVR VIDEO OUT jacks and will not be recorded. • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode is automatically activated (see page 41). BASIC OPERATION STATUSVOL:-40dB DVDMovieViewing MOVIE MovieSpacious INPUT:DVD A.SEL:HDMI NIGHT:CINEMA(MID) [DISPLAY]:STATUSOFF Muting the audio output Press IMUTE to mute the audio output. Press IMUTE again to resume the audio output. y • You can also rotate LVOLUME or press LVOLUME +/– to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 63). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. English 37 En Playback Playing video sources in the background of an audio source You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press the input selector buttons (4) to select a video source and then an audio source. ■ Audio information Information Descriptions FORMAT Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. USB CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR Audio sources Video sources V-AUX Note y • You can also select “MULTI CH” as the audio source (see page 36). Press 4AMP and then press DMULTI CH IN. • Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the desired setting to select the default background video input source of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 67). Displaying the input source information “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding information. ■ Video information Information Descriptions HDMI SIGNAL Type of the source video signals and the video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. HDMI RES. Resolution of the HDMI signals input or output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit. 1 HDMI ERROR Error message for HDMI sources or connected HDMI devices. See “HDMI error and message” for details. Press 4AMP and then KMENU. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. (Only when error is detected) SET MENU TOP MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Note “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding information. HDMI error and message Message 2 Press 7n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press 7ENTER. The audio information about the input source appears in the OSD. 3 Press 7l / h to toggle between the audio and video information displays. 4 Press KMENU again to exit from “SET MENU”. 38 En Cause DEVICE OVER The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. HDCP ERROR HDCP authentication failed. OUT OF RES. The connected monitor is not compatible with the resolution of the input video signal. Playback Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. Press 4AMP and then press RSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press RSLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP 120min SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min SLEEP 90min SLEEP 60min The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. BASIC OPERATION y • To cancel the sleep timer, press 4AMP and then press RSLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or HSTANDBY) to set the main zone to the standby mode. English 39 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field programs This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. Press OPROGRAM l / h (or press 4AMP and then press APROG l / h repeatedly). The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 36). • When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 41). y Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself. Sound field program descriptions Category MUSIC Program Features Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program presents an image of pop, rock, or jazz live concert. The sound field reproduces the spaciousness of a massive pavilion with an emphasis on the vividness of vocals on the stage and solo instruments and the beats of rhythm instruments. Hall CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is suitable for classic and orchestral music. The program uses data collected in a large concert hall in Munich. You can enjoy delicate and beautiful reverberation and a majestic atmosphere. Jazz CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for jazz and fusion music. It uses data collected in a famous jazz club in New York. You can enjoy clear reverberation. Game CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy dynamic and thrilling sound effects as you play games. The program lets you feel the depth and three-dimensional surrounding sounds of the field where you are playing, and offers cinema-like surrounding sound effects for the scenes of movies. TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy sports relays broadcast in stereo and variety shows with a live sound environment. For sports relays, the voices of commentators and announcers come clearly from the center; the cheers and atmosphere in the stadium spread around within a comfortable range, and you can feel like as if you are in the stadium. Movie Spacious CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for movies with an emphasis on spectacular sound effects, and is a perfect fit with a wide screen. The program reproduces a wide dynamic range from minimum sound effects to powerful sounds. Movie Dramatic CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is also suitable for movies with an emphasis on three-dimensional sound effects. It restrains reverberation to an moderate extent, but reproduces sound effects and background music in a soft, three-dimensional manner with clarity and center orientation of voices as pivots. 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel or plays back 2-channel sources as they are. 7ch Stereo CINEMA DSP processing. Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. 2ch Enhancer 7ch Enhancer Select these programs to play back compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) in 2-channel or 7-channel stereo. This program enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE STEREO MUSIC ENHANCER Note The sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from each direction. 40 En Sound field programs ■ Enjoying 2-channel sources using the standard decoders Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multi-channels. Press 4AMP and then press OSUR. DECODE repeatedly to select a decoder. You can select from the following decoders depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. Decoder Functions Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources PLII Music PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music sources PLII Game PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game sources Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music sources Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers by creating virtual speakers. If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 60), Virtual CINEMA DSP is automatically activated whenever you select a CINEMA DSP program (see page 40). Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not be activated even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 60) in the following cases: – when “7ch Stereo” (see page 40) is selected. – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA is automatically activated whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP sound field programs (except for 7ch) (see page 40). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION Pro Logic ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ■ Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Press PSTRAIGHT (or press 4AMP and then press BSTRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”. To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press PSTRAIGHT (or press 4AMP and then BSTRAIGHT) again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. English 41 En Sound field programs ■ Editing sound fields parameters y You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory default parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. For Pop/Rock, Hall, Jazz, Game, TV Sports, Movie Spacious and Movie Dramatic: 1 While listening to a source, press 4AMP and then press QPARAMETER. 2 Press 7k / n to select the desired parameter you want to change. 3 Press 7l / h to change the parameter value. Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter. DSP level DSP LEVEL Function: Adjusts the effect level. Choices: MIN, MID, MAX For 2ch Enhancer and 7ch Enhancer Note You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 68). Effect level EFFECT LEVEL Function: Adjusts the effect level. Choices: LOW, HIGH For Pro Logic II Music and Pro Logic IIx Music: Panorama PANORAMA Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Choices: OFF, ON Dimension DIMENSION Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). Center width CT WIDTH Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For Neo:6 Music Center image C.IMAGE Function: Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0, initial setting is 0.3. 42 En USING AUDIO FEATURES Using audio features Enjoying high quality sound Use the DIRECT mode to enjoy the high quality sounds of the selected source. When the DIRECT mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note Press QDIRECT (or press 4AMP and then CDIRECT) to select “DIRECT”. This operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 26) and “SP LEVEL” (see page 61). Notes 1 • “TONE CONTROL” and “SOUND MENU” (see page 59) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not effective. • The front panel display automatically dims. Press 4AMP and then press 6LEVEL on the remote control and then 7k / n to select the speaker you want to adjust. y Adjusting the tonal quality Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front left and right speaker channels. y Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. 1 2 Press NTONE CONTROL repeatedly to select the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when this unit is in the DIRECT mode, or when MULTI CH is selected as the input source. FRONT L Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SB L Surround back left speaker SB R Surround back right speaker y • Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SUR.B” is displayed if “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 60). • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. • When the video monitor is turned on, the “SP LEVEL” adjustment menu appears in the video monitor. Press OPROGRAM l / h repeatedly to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). Notes Adjusted speaker BASIC OPERATION Display While DIRECT mode is activated, the front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation is performed. 2 Press 7l / h to adjust the speaker output level. • Press 7h to increase the value. • Press 7l to decrease the value. • Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB 3 Press 6LEVEL to turn off the speaker level adjustment display. English 43 En Using audio features Selecting the night listening mode The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. 1 Press 4AMP and then PNIGHT repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. y When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press 7l / h to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. Effect.Lvl:MID Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. y “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: – when the DIRECT mode (see page 43) is selected. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 36). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. 44 En FM/AM TUNING FM/AM tuning There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations. Automatic tuning Manual tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. 1 Press RINPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. Press E BAND to select the reception band (FM or AM). 3 Press ITUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. Lights up Note Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. 1 Press RINPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. 2 Press E BAND to select the reception band (FM or AM). 3 Press ITUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. AUTO BASIC OPERATION 2 If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. AFM 88.90MHz No colon (:) AFM 88.90MHz If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, automatic tuning is not possible. Press DPRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. Lights up No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, manual tuning is not possible. Press DPRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune into the desired station manually. y Hold down the button to continue searching. TUNED AFM 88.90MHz English 45 En FM/AM tuning Automatic preset tuning You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. 1 2 3 Press RINPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. Press E BAND to select “FM” as the reception band. Manual preset tuning You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. 1 Tune into a station automatically or manually. See page 45 for tuning instructions. 2 Press HMEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 30 seconds. 3 Press F A/B/C/D/E and GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly to select a preset station group (A1 to E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. Press and hold HMEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. Flashes Flashes MEMORY A3:FM 88.90MHz MEMORY AUTO Preset station group and number A1:FM 88.90MHz Colon (:) Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y 4 Press HMEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. You can select the preset station group and the preset station number where the first received station will be stored by pressing F A/B/C/D/E and then GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. TUNED A1:FM 88.90MHz Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on this page. • Only Radio Data System broadcasting station are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning (Europe and Russia models only). 46 En The displayed station has been stored as A1. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. FM/AM tuning Selecting preset stations You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. y When performing this operation with the remote control, press 4 TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 2 Press FA/B/C/D/E (or 7A/B/C/D/E l / h) repeatedly to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. Exchanging preset station You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. 1 Select preset station “E1” using FA/B/C/D/E and GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on this page. 2 Press and hold D PRESET/TUNING for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Flashes BASIC OPERATION Press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 7 PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. MEMORY E1:FM 88.90MHz Flashes 3 E1:FM 88.90MHz y You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control. Select preset station “A5” using FA/B/C/D/E and GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Flashes MEMORY A5:FM 88.90MHz Flashes 4 Press D PRESET/TUNING again. “EXCHANGE E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. English 47 En RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE AND RUSSIA MODELS ONLY) Radio Data System tuning (Europe and Russia models only) Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON (enhanced other networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations. Displaying the Radio Data System information 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. • We recommend using the automatic preset tuning to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (see page 46). • You can also use PTY SEEK mode to tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station from the preset ones. 2 Press 0 FREQ/TEXT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data System display mode. Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data System information: PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The corresponding indicators light up in the front panel display. Notes • You can select one of the Radio Data System display modes only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicator lights up in the front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the station. • You can select only the available Radio Data System display modes being offered by the station. • If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and may not be available even when the other Radio Data System display modes are available. • In case of poor reception conditions, press I TUNING AUTO/MAN’L on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front panel display. • When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with the “_” (underscore). • If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT WAIT” appears in the front panel display. 48 En PS PTY RT CT Frequency display • Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “RT” to display the information on the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “CT” to display the current time. Radio Data System tuning (Europe and Russia models only) Selecting the Radio Data System program type (PTY SEEK mode) Use this feature to select the desired radio program by program type from the all preset Radio Data System broadcasting stations. 3 Press 7PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control to select the desired program type. The name of the selected program type appears in the front panel display. y Use the automatic preset tuning feature to preset Radio Data System broadcasting stations (see page 46). POP M Press 3 TUNER on the remote control to select “TUNER” as the input source. Lights up 1 Program type 2 NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture y SCIENCE Science To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press 0PTY SEEK MODE on the remote control again. VARIED Light entertainment POP M Popular music ROCK M Rock music M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easy-listening) LIGHT M Light classics CLASSICS Serious classics OTHER M Other music NEWS Flashes BASIC OPERATION Press 0PTY SEEK MODE on the remote control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK mode. The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in the front panel display. Descriptions English 49 En Radio Data System tuning (Europe and Russia models only) 4 Press 0PTY SEEK START on the remote control to start searching for all the available Radio Data System preset stations. The name of the selected program type flashes and the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel display while this unit is searching for stations. POP M Flashes PTY HOLD Lights up y To stop searching for stations, press 0PTY SEEK START on the remote control again. Notes • This unit stops searching for stations when a station broadcasting the selected program type is found. • If the station found is not the one you desire, press 0PTY SEEK START again to resume searching for another station broadcasting the same program type. Using the enhanced other networks (EON) data service Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other networks) data service of the Radio Data System station network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this unit automatically searches for all the available preset stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data service of the selected program type for a certain duration of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this unit automatically switches to the local station broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back to the national station once the EON data service ends. Notes • You can use this feature only when the EON data service is available. • The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data System station. 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. 2 Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front panel display. If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel display, select another Radio Data System program so that the EON indicator lights up. EON 3 Press 0EON on the remote control repeatedly to select one of the 4 Radio Data System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO or SPORT). The name of the selected program type appears in the front panel display. NEWS Lights up y To cancel the EON feature, press 0EON on the remote control repeatedly until the name of the program type disappears and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel display. 50 En USING A USB MEMORY DEVICE OR A USB PORTABLE AUDIO PLAYER Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. ■ Supported USB devices This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (except USB hard disk drives) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. Notes • Only the first partition (32 GB or less) is displayed in the OSD. You cannot select files in other partitions. • Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per directory are recognized. • Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the requirements. • Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played. Playback operation Follow the procedures below to enjoy the music stored in your USB device or a USB portable audio player. 1 Press R INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press 3USB) to select USB. The cursor on the left of the USB indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the contents previously played is automatically played. Lights up MULTI CH DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R CD BASIC OPERATION ■ Connecting a USB memory device or a USB potable audio player TUNER USB INPUT:USB Connect a USB jack of a USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. VOLUME 2 Press MDISPLAY to display the top USB file list. The USB file list appears in the OSD. MAIN ZONE ON/OFF OPTIMIZER MIC SYSTEM OFF ZONE 2 ON/OFF EDIT PRESET/TUNING BAND l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L ZONE CONTROL USB Root Ellis Margellis Frankie Zipper Hall in Call Jackie Pastarius Jmiel Jean-Luc Ponta Jim Hallo SCENE 1 l PHONES SILENT CINEMA SPEAKERS A/B/OFF TONE CONTROL PROGRAM 2 3 STRAIGHT DIRECT h 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO USB R EFFECT USB > > > > > > > 1/7 y USB memory device or USB portable audio player • “i” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that there is a submenu available in the next menu level. • When this unit is in the top directory, “Root” appears beside “USB”. English 51 En Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player 3 4 Press 7 k / n / l / h on the remote control to select the desired file. • Press 7 k / n to select the desired file/folder. • Press 7 ENTER or 7 h to enter the selected folder. • Press 7 l to return to the previous folder level. ■ The function of the play information display USB Press 7ENTER to play the selected file. y • You can use 0 b / a to skip backward/forward and 9 h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD. • You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the “USB PLAY STYLE” parameters in “OPTION MENU” (see page 70). • You can select the display mode in the front panel display by using “FL SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 68). [Play] [1] [2] [3] . [4] 00:00 All FrankieZipper Made-to-orderaaaaaAA ;RoadtoIndiaaaAAAA [5] [6] [7] .A [1] Name of the artist [2] Name of the album [3] Name of the song [4] Elapsed time Note When the elapsed time exceed “99:59”, “--:--” appeared instead of the time. [5] [6] (playback) icon All (all repeat), 1 (single repeat) icons When “REPEAT” of the “USB PLAY STYLE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 70) is set to “OFF”, no icon appears in the top right corner while files or folders are being played. [7] (shuffle) icon When “SHUFFLE” of the “USB PLAY STYLE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 70) is set to “OFF”, no icon appears in the top right corner while files or holders are being played. 52 En USING IPOD™ Using iPod™ Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 20), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 20). Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. y • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 85. • Once your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod. • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK indicator lights up in the front panel display. • Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). ■ Remote control operation Before performing the following operations, press 3V-AUX/DOCK. Button 7 ENTER Function Subsequent menu k Menu up n Menu down l Previous menu h Subsequent menu 9 ll BASIC OPERATION Controlling iPod™ ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the OSD of this unit. y • You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod (some models only). • Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. Search backward (Press and hold) hh Search forward (Press and hold) b Skip backward a Skip forward s Stop e Pause (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) p Play (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) K MENU Previous menu M DISPLAY Display English 53 En Using iPod™ ■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control when you connect this unit and a monitor using the S VIDEO or VIDEO connection. You can browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. y • The name of the song being played also appears in the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 68). • You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-SOURCE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 68) Notes • Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. • The Yamaha logo appears in the display window of your iPod. • There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”. • The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the OSD. Press 7ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the “Settings” parameter settings. • You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. 1 Press 3V-AUX/DOCK and then M DISPLAY. The following display appears in the OSD. iPod Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Settings Shuffle Shuffle Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in random order. y When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. Repeat Repeat Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. y When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ” appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. 1 ■ The function of the play information display [1] > > > > > > > [4] [5] [6] 2 Press 7 k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod menu and then press 7ENTER to begin playback of the selected song. Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings (settings) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Settings > Shuffle, Repeat iPod[Play] 1/9 FrankieZipper Made-to-order RoadtoIndia ||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; 0:51-7:44 All [2] [3] Top [1] Playback status [2] Track number/total tracks [3] Artist name [4] Song title [5] Progress bar [6] Elapsed time [7] Shuffle and repeat icons [8] (playback), forward) and [9] Name of the album [10] Remaining time 54 En All (pausing), (search (search backward) [7] [8] [9] [10] USING BLUETOOTH™ COMPONENTS Using Bluetooth™ components You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth adapter and your Bluetooth component in advance. Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your Bluetooth™ component Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth adapter connected to this unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications. Note If the Bluetooth adapter is not connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, “No BT adapter” appears in the front panel display. Check that the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth adapter. If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth adapter, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the Bluetooth device list. 5 Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass key “0000” on the Bluetooth component. When the pairing procedure is successful, “Completed” appears in the front panel display. y • You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth adapter. • Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other component with which Bluetooth communications are to be established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s operating instructions. There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “START PAIRING” in “SET MENU” and quick pairing. ■ Pairing by using “SET MENU” Use this feature to perform pairing with the video monitor. Select “START PAIRING” in “INPUT MENU”. See page 69 for details. ■ Quick pairing To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. Note The Yamaha Bluetooth adapter can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data for the least recently used other component is cleared. Playback of the Bluetooth™ component 1 Press RINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press 3V-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the input source. 1 Press RINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press 3V-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the input source. 2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want to pair with. 2 3 Press and hold EBAND (or 6BAND) for 3 seconds to start pairing. Once the Bluetooth adapter starts pairing, “Searching...” appears for a moment. While the Bluetooth adapter is in the pairing mode, DOCK indicator flashes in the front panel display. Start playback of your Bluetooth component. When the connected Bluetooth adapter detects the Bluetooth component, “BT connected” and the DOCK indicator appears in the front panel display. y • When you press 7ENTER, the connected Bluetooth adapter searches and connect to the last connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth adapter cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in the front panel display. • To disconnect the Bluetooth adapter from the Bluetooth component, press 8RETURN. 55 En English y To cancel the pairing, press EBAND (or 6BAND) again. BASIC OPERATION 4 RECORDING Recording Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. Notes • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • TONE CONTROL (see page 43) and VOLUME settings, speaker levels (see page 43) and the sound field programs (see page 40) do not affect recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital signals, you cannot record the source. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or a composite video signal on your DVD recorder. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep the component turned on while using this unit. If the component is turned off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Press RINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons (3)) to select the source component you want to record from. 56 En 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 26). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Parameter Features Page Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the crossover frequency, and the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals. 59 B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 61 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 62 D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 62 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 62 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 63 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay, maximum volume level and initial volume level. 63 H)HDMI SET Selects whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack. 64 I)EXTD SUR. Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders by using the connected surround back speakers. 64 ADVANCED OPERATION A)SPEAKER SET Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Parameter Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 65 B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 66 C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each input source. 66 D)DECODER MODE Selects the decoder mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. 66 E)MULTI CH SET Selects the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 67 English 57 En SET MENU Option menu 3 OPTION MENU Parameter Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display and the way in which the iPod information is displayed. 67 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings. 68 C)AUDIO SELECT Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. 68 D)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 69 E)BLUETOOTH SET Pair the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with a Bluetooth component (see page 55). 69 F)USB PLAY STYLE Adjusts the playback style of a USB source. 70 ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 38). Using SET MENU 3 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. y ;MANUAL SETUP You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. 1 . 1 SOUND MENU 2 INPUT MENU 3 OPTION MENU Press 4 AMP and then press K MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. 4 Press 7 k / n / l / h and 7 ENTER to select and change the parameter. • Press 7 k / n to select the desired menu or parameter. • Press 7 l / h to change the parameter value. • Press 7 ENTER to enter the selected menu or to confirm the parameter. • Press 8 RETURN to return to the previous menu level. 5 Press K MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. TOPAMENU . ;AUTO SETUP .A;MANUAL SETUP ;SIGNAL INFO p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press 7 k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”. SET MENU TOPAMENU ;AUTO SETUP .A;MANUAL SETUP ;SIGNAL INFO 58 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p SET MENU 2 Press 7 ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the OSD. SET MENU 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. ;MANUAL SETUP Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE ;MANUAL SETUP 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 . F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET H)HDMI SET I)EXTD SUR. 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET FRONT SP p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p . A)SPEAKER SET B)SP LEVEL C)SP DISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ E)LFE LEVEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET SMALL >LARGE Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. FRONT B speaker setting FRONT B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET FRONT B;;;;FRONT • Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals are set in the main zone. • Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals are set in another zone. If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at the FRONT B terminals only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the sound is output from both headphones and the FRONT B terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”. • If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 41). When the front speakers are small Select “SMALL” (small). Note When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT” (see page 60), you can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”. Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG 1 SOUND MENU ADVANCED OPERATION p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select When the front speakers are large Select “LARGE” (large). A)SPEAKER SET CENTER SP NONE >SML LRG When the center speaker is large Select “LRG” (large). When the center speaker is small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the center speaker Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. English 59 En SET MENU Surround left/right speakers Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SUR. L/R SP LFE Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET SUR. L/R SP 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET LFE/BASS OUT NONE >SML LRG SWFR FRNT>BOTH When the surround speakers are large Select “LRG” (large). When the surround speakers are small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the surround speakers Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 41). Surround back left/right speakers SUR.B L/R SP Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET SUR.B L/R SP NONE SMLx1 >SMLx2 When the surround back left and right speakers are large Select “LRGx2” (large x 2). When the single surround back speaker is large Select “LRGx1” (large x 1). When the surround back left and right speakers are small Select “SMLx2” (small x 2). When the single surround back speaker is small Select “SMLx1” (small x 1). When you do not use the surround back speakers Select “NONE” (none). The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. 60 En When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get natural bass sound Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get rich bass sound Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 59). When you do not use a subwoofer Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the lowfrequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 59). SET MENU Crossover CROSS OVER Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 59). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or front speakers depending on the setting of “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 59). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET CROSSOVER ■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each speaker. Control range: –10 to +10 dB Control step: 1 dB Initial setting: 0 dB 1 SOUND MENU 1 SOUND MENU B)SP LEVEL 1/2 -__________+ . FR.L FR.R CNTR SWFR B)SP LEVEL 2/2 -__________+ .SUR.L SUR.R SBL SBR FREQ;;;80Hz SP LEVEL Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET SUBWOOFER PHASE REVERSE • Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. FR.L FR.R Front right speaker CNTR Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR.L Surround left speaker SUR.R Surround right speaker SBL Surround back left speaker SBR Surround back right speaker ADVANCED OPERATION >NORMAL Adjusted speaker Front left speaker Notes • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. • Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SUR.B” is displayed if “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 60). English 61 En SET MENU ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. 1 SOUND MENU C)SP DISTANCE C)SP DISTANCE 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 . SUR. L;;;;;2.40m SUR. R;;;;;2.40m SB L;;;;;;;2.40m SB R;;;;;;;2.40m p p p p Adjusted speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SB L Surround back left speaker SB R Surround back right speaker Notes • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. • Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SUR.B” is displayed if “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 60). Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and front left speakers. ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective when the input signal contains the LFE channel. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB 1 SOUND MENU E)LFE LEVEL . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust p Front left speaker Test tone TEST Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ” while listening to a test tone. p FRONT L p Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) Initial setting: FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft) SUR. L/SUR. R/SB L/SB R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft) 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p D)CENTER GEQ TEST >OFF ON . 100Hz ;;;;;; 300Hz ;;;;;; 1kHz ;;;;;; 3kHz ;;;;;; 10kHz ;;;;;; [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. 62 En Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0 dB 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 . UNIT;;;;;;meters FRONT L;;;;3.00m FRONT R;;;;3.00m CENTER;;;;;2.60m SWFR;;;;;;;3.00m [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust SP DISTANCE ■ Center speaker equalizer D)CENTER GEQ Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band (100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You can make adjustments while listening to the currently selected source component or a test tone. Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 60), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. SET MENU ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. 1 SOUND MENU F)DYNAMIC RANGE . SPEAKER;;;;;;MAX HEADPHONE;;;;MAX p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker compression. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone compression. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. Maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is –80 dB to +16 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –5 dB, the volume range becomes –80 dB to –5 dB. Control range: –30 dB to +10 dB, +16 dB Control step: 5 dB Note The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT.VOL.” setting. For example, if “INIT.VOL.” is set to –20 dB and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. Initial volume INIT.VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80 dB to +16 dB Control step: 1 dB Note The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT.VOL.” setting. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. 1 SOUND MENU G)AUDIO SET . MUTE TYPE;;;FULL A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms MAX VOL.;;;+16dB INIT.VOL.;;;;OFF p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select Mute type MUTE TYPE Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 37). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay A.DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms English 63 En SET MENU ■ HDMI set H)HDMI SET Use this feature to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals. ■ Extended surround I)EXTD SUR. 1 SOUND MENU I)EXTD SUR. . >AUTO LAST EXTD SUR.;;;;;;AUTO 1 SOUND MENU H)HDMI SET [p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return SUPPORT AUDIO: RX-V563 [p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Choice RX-V563 Other Functions Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI input jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Plays back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Notes • This unit transmits audio and video signals input at the HDMI input jacks to the HDMI out jack only when this unit is turned on even if “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “Other”. • Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of each connected component. 64 En Extended decoder select mode Use this feature to designate the extended decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the digital audio input signal and activate the appropriate decoder. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder mode set for “EXTD SUR.”. Extended decoder specifying Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders by using the connected surround back speakers. Choice Functions AUTO Activates the optimum decoder to play back signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit recognizes a signal flag being input. PLIIxMovie Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. (when 2 surround back speakers are used.) PLIIxMusic Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder. OFF Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1 channels. SET MENU 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the decoder mode or rename the input source. For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 4 OPTICAL OUT (4) Choices: (4) MD/CD-R, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR 2 INPUT MENU ;MANUAL SETUP A)I/O ASSIGNMENT OPTICAL OUT . (4);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) 2 INPUT MENU [p]/[[]:Select p p . A)I/O ASSIGNMENT B)INPUT RENAME C)VOLUME TRIM D)DECODER MODE E)MULTI CH SET [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Input and output assignment A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using RINPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons (3)). 2 INPUT MENU A)I/O ASSIGNMENT HDMI IN . [IN1];;; DVD ( DVD ) [IN2];;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) [p]/[[]:Select ADVANCED OPERATION For COAXIAL INPUT jack 1 COAXIAL IN (1) Choices: (1) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR For HDMI jacks 1 and 2 HDMI IN [1] HDMI IN [2] Choices: [1] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR [2] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR 2 INPUT MENU A)I/O ASSIGNMENT COAXIAL IN . (1);;;;; ( DVD DVD ) [p]/[[]:Select For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 and 3 OPTICAL IN (2) OPTICAL IN (3) Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR 2 INPUT MENU A)I/O ASSIGNMENT OPTICAL IN . (2);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) (3);;;;; CD ( CD ) [p]/[[]:Select English Note You cannot select a specific item more than once. 65 En SET MENU ■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. 2 INPUT MENU B)INPUT RENAME DVD -> DVD 1 p p [p]/[[]:Position [ ]/[ ]:Chara. ■ Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to adjust the output volume of each source. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, DOCK, USB, MULTI CH Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB Press one of the input selector buttons (3) or D MULTI CH IN to select the input source you want to change the name of. 2 INPUT MENU C)VOLUME TRIM DVD DVD ;;;;;0.0dB USB CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR [p]/[[]:Adjust [RETURN]:Exit or MULTI CH IN Note V-AUX/DOCK 2 Notes • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press 7 n to change the character in the following order, or press 7 k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press 7 ENTER to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. 66 En 2 INPUT MENU D)DECODER MODE . >AUTO CD DVD DTV/CBL LAST ;;;;AUTO ;;;;AUTO ;;;;AUTO [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select p Press 7 k / n to select the character you want to use and then press 7 l / h to move to the next space. ■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE p 3 Press 4 AMP and then press 7 l / h on the remote control to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. You can only adjust the value for DOCK when your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit. Decoder select mode Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder mode used the connected input source. DTS decoder prioritize setting Choices: AUTO, DTS • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “DTS” when you play back a DTS-CD. SET MENU ■ Multi channel input setup E)MULTI CH SET 2 INPUT MENU 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. E)MULTI CH SET BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST INPUT CH;;;;;6CH ;MANUAL SETUP 3 OPTION MENU [p]/[[]:Select p If the connected component outputs discrete 6-channel audio signals. Select “6CH”. If the connected component outputs discrete 8-channel audio signals. Select “8CH”. Also set “FRONT” (see below) to the analog audio jacks at which the front left and right channel signals output from the connected component are input. Front left and right channels input jack FRONT If you selected “8CH” in “INPUT CH”, you can select the analog audio jacks at which the front left and right channel signals output from the connected external decoder is input. Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, V-AUX Note “FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”. 2/2 [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: –4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press 7 l to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press 7 h to make the front panel display brighter. Video conversion VIDEO CONV. Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to convert composite and S-video signals interchangeably, or to convert composite and S-video to component video signals. • Select “OFF” not to convert any signals. ADVANCED OPERATION [p]/[[]:Select [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select A)DISPLAY SET . OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 OSD-SOURCE;;;30s OSD-AMP;;;;;;30s p BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST INPUT CH;;;;;8CH FRONT;;;;;;;;DVD . DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 VIDEO CONV;;;;ON FL SCROLL;;;CONT 3 OPTION MENU 1/2 p E)MULTI CH SET A)DISPLAY SET p 2 INPUT MENU p ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET p Input channels INPUT CH Use this setting to select the number of channels input from an external decoder (see page 19). Choices: 6CH, 8CH 2/2 [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 3 OPTION MENU Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last selected video source as the background video source. 3 OPTION MENU . F)USB PLAY STYLE p y . A)DISPLAY SET B)MEMORY GUARD C)AUDIO SELECT D)PARAM. INI E)BLUETOOTH SET [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p Background Video BGV Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, LAST ;MANUAL SETUP 1/2 Notes • This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals interchangeably. • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”. • When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals even if you set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”. English 67 En SET MENU Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as a song title or a channel name) in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once when “DOCK” is selected as the input source. Choices: CONT, ONCE • Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: –5 (dowmward) to +5 (upward) Control step: 1 Initial setting: 0 • Press 7 l to lower the position of the OSD. • Press 7 h to raise the position of the OSD. • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – sound field program parameters – all “SET MENU” items – all speaker levels – SCENE template parameters Source feature OSD display time OSD-SOURCE Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the iPod menu in the OSD after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD unceasingly during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. Note Amplifier function OSD display time OSD-AMP Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the status after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD constantly during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. 68 En 3 OPTION MENU B)MEMORY >OFF GUARD ON [p]/[[]:Select When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other “SET MENU” items. ■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST 3 OPTION MENU C)AUDIO SELECT >AUTO LAST [p]/[[]:Select • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the connected input source (see page 36). SET MENU ■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM. INI Use this feature to set all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings. Choices: NO, YES ■ Bluetooth setting E)BLUETOOTH SET 3 OPTION MENU E)BLUETOOTH SET . START PAIRING 3 OPTION MENU D)PARAM. INI [ENTER]:Enter >NO YES [p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select “NO” to cancel the parameter initialization and return to the previous menu screen. • Select “YES” and press 7 ENTER to set all the sound field parameters to the initial factory settings. Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with your Bluetooth component. For details about the pairing, refer to “Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your Bluetooth™ component” on page 55. To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize the sound field program parameters. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”. 7 ENTER to start pairing. The connected Bluetooth adapter starts searching Bluetooth components. “Searching...” appears in the video monitor. 2 Check that the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth adapter. If the Bluetooth component the Bluetooth adapter, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the Bluetooth device list. 3 Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass key “0000” on the Bluetooth component. Once this unit completes the pairing successfully, “Pairing completed” appears. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 y To cancel the pairing, press 8 RETURN to exit from “START PAIRING”. 4 Press 8 RETURN to exit from “START PAIRING”. Notes • If the connected Bluetooth adapter cannot find any Bluetooth components, “Not found” appears. • If a Bluetooth adapter is not connected to this unit, “No BT adapter” appears. English 69 En SET MENU ■ USB playback styles F)USB PLAY STYLE Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to your preference. You can shuffle files in a random order or repeat one specific file or a sequence of files. 3 OPTION MENU F)USB PLAY STYLE . REPEAT.......OFF SHUFFLE......OFF p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select Repeat REPEAT Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one file or a sequence of files. Choices: OFF, SINGLE, ALL • Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature. • Select “SINGLE” to set this unit to repeat one file. • Select “ALL” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of files. Shuffle SHUFFLE Use this feature to set this unit to play files or folders in a random order. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature. • Select “ON” to set this unit to play files or folders in a random order. 70 En Remote control features Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 73). Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Press 4 AMP to control this unit. POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV USB A B MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL C D AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE *1 DTV/CBL TV VOL AMP SCENE 1 2 BAND LEVEL TITLE POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV USB A B MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER TV CH DVR V-AUX/DOCK Press 3 DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV/CBL (see page 73). 3 DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK C D AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 TV CH *1 TV VOL 4 SCENE VOLUME MENU BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 4 VOLUME MENU ENTER ENTER DISPLAY RETURN MEMORY *2 REC DISPLAY RETURN MEMORY REC FREQ/TEXT l EON PROG h MODE - PTY SEEK - START 3 4 NIGHT PARAMETER 6 7 8 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 0 10 FREQ/TEXT SLEEP ENT EON MODE - PTY SEEK - START l PROG h 1 2 3 4 STRAIGHT DIRECT NIGHT PARAMETER 5 6 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 0 ADVANCED OPERATION 2 DIRECT 5 9 *2 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 1 STRAIGHT 10 8 SLEEP ENT Notes *1 These buttons always control this unit. *2 These buttons control this unit only when 4 AMP is pressed. Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether you press 3 DTV/CBL or not. Remote control *2 Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV INPUT Changes the input source. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. These buttons control your TV only when 3 DTV/CBL is pressed. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on page 72. y 71 En English You can control more than one TV by setting the appropriate remote control code for any input source selector buttons other than 3 DTV/CBL. In such a case, you can control the buttons highlighted above (*1 and *2) when you press the input source selector button. Remote control features ■ Controlling other components Press one of the input selector buttons (3) or A to D buttons to control other components. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 73). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button. Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. [1] [2] POWER POWER TV AV USB STANDBY POWER A B MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK C D AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE TV CH BAND LEVEL TITLE [3] [4] MENU • The remote control has 13 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 13 different components. • When you press one of the optional component control area buttons (A to D), you can control the desired component without changing the input source of this unit. RETURN MEMORY [5] TV VOL SCENE 1 2 3 4 FREQ/TEXT [6] EON MODE - PTY SEEK - START l PROG h 1 2 3 4 STRAIGHT DIRECT NIGHT PARAMETER 5 6 7 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 0 Digital TV/ Cable TV LD player CD player MD/CD recorder [1] AV POWER Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 [2] TITLE Title [3] PRESET/CH k [8] DISPLAY DVD player/ VCR recorder Power *1 [7] ENTER REC y Remote control VOLUME 10 8 SLEEP ENT [9] Tuner Band Up VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8)/ Tuning up PRESET/CH n Down VCR channel down Down Preset down (1-8)/Tuning down A/B/C/D/E l Left Left Preset down (A-E) A/B/C/D/E h Right Right Preset up (A-E) ENTER Enter Enter Hold [4] RETURN Return Return Memory [5] REC Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec Rec *2 p Play Play Play *2 w Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Information Search backward *2 f Search forward Search forward Search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward *2 Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Audio program down a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Audio program up s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop [6] 1-9, 0, +10 Play Stop Disc skip Rec Play Play Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Menu Preset stations (1-8) [7] MENU Menu [8] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Search mode [9] ENT Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index Enter Notes *1 *2 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 73). 72 En Remote control features Setting remote control codes 1 You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. While pressing and holding one of the input selector buttons (3) on the remote control to select the input area you want to set up, press 2 AV POWER for more than 3 seconds. USB A B CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK C D Remote control code default settings Input source Component category Manufacturer Default code CD Yamaha 5013 MD/CD-R CD-R Yamaha 5001 TUNER TUNER Yamaha 5007 DVD DVD Yamaha 2000 DTV/CBL — — — V-AUX TUNER Yamaha 5011 DVR DVR Yamaha 2011 USB TUNER Yamaha 5012 A TUNER Yamaha 5009 B TUNER Yamaha 5017 C TUNER Yamaha 5009 D TUNER Yamaha 5017 AV Press for 3 seconds While holding down 2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (F) to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component to be used. When the setting succeeds, “RemoteSetup OK” appears; however, when it does not, “RemoteSetup NG” appears in the front panel display. Notes • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup procedure. Note ADVANCED OPERATION CD POWER You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code. English 73 En Using multi-zone configuration Using multi-zone configuration This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connecting Zone 2 You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone. • An amplifier and speakers in the second zone. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below. REMOTE REMOTE IN Infrared signal receiver OUT REMOTE IN OUT Yamaha component This unit REMOTE IN OUT Yamaha component ■ Using the external amplifier Connect the amplifier/receiver in the second zone and other components to this unit as follows. From the ZONE 2 OUT jacks Amplifier Main zone Second zone (Zone 2) Infrared signal receiver Remote control DVD player This unit Infrared signal emitter From the REMOTE OUT jacks From the REMOTE IN jacks Note To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 74 En Using multi-zone configuration Controlling Zone 2 You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The available operations are as follows: • Selecting the input source of Zone 2. • Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 45). • Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source (see page 53). • Enjoying music stored on your Bluetooth component being performed “paring” operation with a Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit when “VAUX” is selected as the input source (see page 55). ■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel Turning on Zone 2 Press K ZONE CONTROL to turn on Zone 2. Activating the Zone 2 operation mode Press K ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2. The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. ZONE2 Flashes Note You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection procedure. ADVANCED OPERATION English 75 En Using multi-zone configuration Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2 operation mode. Operating Zone 2 Press RINPUT l / h to select the desired input source while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in the front panel display. • Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the TUNER features in Zone 2. For details about the TUNER operations, see “FM/AM tuning” on page 45. • Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use iPod features in Zone 2. For details about the iPod operations, see “Using iPod™” on page 53. • Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use Bluetooth component features in Zone 2. For details about the Bluetooth component operations, see “Using Bluetooth™ components” on page 55. Set Zone 2 to the standby mode Press B ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the standby mode. y Press CSYSTEM OFF to set the main zone and Zone 2 to the standby mode simultaneously. 76 En ■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote control Turning on Zone 2 While pressing and holding 4 AMP, press G POWER. While holding down AMP POWER Operating Zone 2 While pressing and holding 4 AMP, press one of the input selector buttons (3) to select the desired input source of Zone 2. Setting Zone 2 to the standby mode While pressing and holding 4 AMP, press H STANDBY to set ZONE 2 to the standby mode. Advanced setup Advanced setup This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • Only A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, O PROGRAM l / h, and P STRAIGHT are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. Press C SYSTEM OFF to set this unit to the standby mode. 2 Press and hold N TONE CONTROL and then press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 3 Press O PROGRAM l / h to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. 4 5 Press PSTRAIGHT repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier function (see page 12). Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-amplifier function. “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” automatically, and this unit outputs the front channel audio signals at the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP speaker terminals. • Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-amplifier function. ■ SCENE IR code setting SCENE IR Use this feature to output the remote control signals at the REMOTE OUT jack automatically when this unit is in the SCENE mode. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” when the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is the Yamaha component and has the capability of the SCENE control signals. This unit automatically sends the remote control signals to the component. • Select “OFF” when the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not the Yamaha component and does not have the capability of the SCENE control signals. Note If noises are output when you operate the SCENE function, set “SCENE IR” to “OFF”. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 ■ Bi-amplifier setting BI-AMP ■ Tuner frequency step TU (Asia and General models only) Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. ■ Initializing INIT. Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings (see page 87). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. Notes 77 En English • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound. 78 En Cause Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 11 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 13-19 No appropriate Audio input jack select has been set. Set an appropriate Audio input jack select. 36 Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 36 Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or “COAX/OPT”. 36 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with RINPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons(3)). 35 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with MSPEAKERS. 35 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press IMUTE or L VOLUME +/– to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 37 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 14 “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “Other” and “HDMI” audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “RX-V563” in “MANUAL SETUP”. 64 Troubleshooting Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause Remedy See page Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press IMUTE or L VOLUME +/– to resume audio output. 37 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 11-19 Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings. 43 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. This is not malfunction. — No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER SP” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 59 One of the sound field programs (except for 7ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 40 “SUR. L/R SP” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 60 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press B STRAIGHT so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 41 “SUR. L/R SP” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE” and “SUR.B L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR. B L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”. 60 “SUR.B L/R SP” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”. 60 No sound from the center, surround or surround back speakers when the FRONT B speakers are activated. “FRONT B” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “ZONE B”. Set “FRONT B” to “FRONT”. 59 No sound is heard from the subwoofer. “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 60 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2channel source is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 60 The source does not contain lowfrequency bass signals. This is not malfunction. — Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. No sound is heard from the surround speakers. No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. English 79 En Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy See page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 36 A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. You are attempting to set the volume level higher than the maximum volume level. Adjust “MAX VOL.” setting. 63 The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. This is not malfunction. — A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON”. Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 68 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — No sound is heard from the connected HDMI component. The HDMI component does not accept the multi-channel audio signals. Convert the multi-channel audio signals to the 2channel audio signals at the source component such as a DVD player. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 11 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This in not malfunction. — This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature is too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — The video conversion function does not work. Some digital signals are input via HDMI jack. Turn off the power of the component connected to HDMI IN jacks. 15 80 En 15, 19 Troubleshooting ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Cause The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 21 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 45 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 45 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Set preset stations. 46 The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 45 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noise can result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 81 En Troubleshooting ■ AUTO SETUP Before AUTO SETUP Error message Cause Remedy See page Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 26 Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. — During AUTO SETUP Error message Cause Remedy See page E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 11 E-2:NO SUR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 11 E-3:SBR->SBL Only a right surround back channel signal is detected. Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. 11 E-4:NOISY Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet environment. — Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — E-5:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. Connect surround speakers when you use surround back speakers. 11 E-6:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 26 E-7:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. Check the microphone setting. 26 Check the speaker connections and placement. 10, 11, 26 E-8:USER CANCEL The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was cancelled due to user activity. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 26 E-9:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 26 82 En Troubleshooting After AUTO SETUP Warning message Cause Remedy See page W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). 12 W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the nearest speaker and the furthest speaker is out of adjustable range. Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. — W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) If “SWFR:TOO LOUD” or “SWFR:TOO LOW” appears, adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 26, 61 Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. — Check the speaker connections. 11 Use speakers of similar quality. — Notes • If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again. • If a warning message “W-1”, “W-2”, or “W-3” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. • If an error message “E-9” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified Yamaha service center. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 83 En Troubleshooting ■ USB Cause The music files and directories in the USB device cannot be viewed. The music files and directories are placed in locations other than the FAT area. Place music files and directories in the FAT area. — You are attempting to browse directory hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory with more than 500 files. Modify the data structure on your USB device. — The USB device cannot be recognized. The connected USB device is other than a USB mass storage class USB memory device or USB portable audio player. This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage class USB memory device (except USB hard disk drives) or USB portable audio player. Also note that it cannot recognize certain USB devices even when they are devices as described above. 51 Some devices may become easier to recognize when they are inserted before turning this unit on. 23 Turn this unit off then on again. 23 “Disconnected” is displayed even when a USB device is present. This unit recognized the USB device as an illegal device. Status message Cause Disconnected Access error Unable to play 84 En Remedy See page Problem Remedy See page Your USB memory device or USB portable audio player has been disconnected from the USB port of this unit. Check the connection between this unit and your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — There is a problem with the signal path from your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port of this unit. 51 Try resetting your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — This unit cannot access your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. Try another USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — There is a problem with the signal path from your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port of this unit. 51 Try resetting your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — Try another USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — No varied data is detected. Troubleshooting ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod (see page 20). Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 20 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 20 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 85 En Troubleshooting ■ Bluetooth Status message Searching... Cause Remedy See page The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth component is in the middle of the pairing. The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth component is in the middle of establishing the connection. Completed The paring is completed. Not found The Bluetooth adapter cannot find the Bluetooth component. Canceled The paring is canceled. BT connected The connection between the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth component is established. Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately). No BT adapter The Bluetooth adapter is not connected to the DOCK terminal. 86 En Connect the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal. 20 Troubleshooting ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 25 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 73 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 73 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. ■ Resetting the system Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Press C SYSTEM OFF on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. 2 Press and hold N TONE CONTROL and then press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to turn on this unit. The advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 3 Press O PROGRAM l / h to select “INIT.”. 4 Press P STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “RESET”. Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. 5 Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press P STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “CANCEL” and then press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. English 87 En Glossary Glossary ■ Bi-amplification connection ■ Dolby Digital A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff. Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. 88 En ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. Glossary ■ Dolby Surround ■ LFE 0.1 channel Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. ■ DTS Digital Surround One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. ■ MP3 ■ HDMI English HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. 89 En Glossary ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It does not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired compression method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression methods including the ADPCM method. ■ WMA An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. 90 En Specifications Specifications AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back [U.S.A. and Canada models] 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω ...................................................... 90 W [Other models] 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω ...................................................... 90 W • Maximum Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back (JEITA) [Asia, General, China, and Korea models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ..................................................... 115 W • Dynamic Power [U.S.A. and Canada models] (IHF, 8/6/4/2 Ω) ............................................ 90/110/130/150 W [Other models] (IHF, 6/4/2 Ω) .................................................... 100/110/125 W • Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models] 8 Ω .................................................................................... 0.18 dB • Maximum Input Signal CD, etc. Effect On, 1 kHz, 0.5% THD ................... 2.0 V or more • Frequency Response CD, etc. to Front L/R ............................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 50 W, Front L/R, 8 Ω ) ............................. 0.06% or less [Other models] (1 kHz, 50 W, Front L/R, 6 Ω ) ............................. 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD (200 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................... 98 dB or more CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance .............. 400 mV/470 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT (REC) ............................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER OUTPUT ............................................ 4 V/1.2 kΩ • Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more • Maximum Input Level........................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component Signal .................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono ................................................................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.5%/0.5% • Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz [Europe and Russia models] .............................. 230 V AC, 50 Hz [Australia model] .............................................. 240 V AC, 50 Hz [Korea model] ................................................... 220 V AC, 60 Hz [China model] .................................................... 220 V AC, 50 Hz [Asia model] ...................................................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [General model] ....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 240 W/320 VA [General model] ................................................................. 260 W [Other models] ................................................................... 240 W • Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.8 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models only] 7ch, 10% THD ................................................................... 490 W • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (FRONT SP, CENTER SP, SUR. L/R SP, SUR. B L/R SP: SMALL/SML) ............................................................ 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ......................................................... 24 dB/oct. • AC Outlets [Australia model] ....................................... 1 (100 W maximum) [U.S.A. and Canada models]............... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Asia, General, China, Europe and Russia models] ............................................................ 2 (Total 50 W maximum) VIDEO SECTION • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 151 x 352 mm (17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 13-7/8”) • Weight ............................................................. 9.0 kg (19 lbs 13 oz) English • Video Signal Type (Gray back) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] .................... NTSC [Other models] ....................................................................... PAL • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) ......................... NTSC/PAL ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shorted) to Front L/R ................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. 91 En INDEX Index ■ Numerics 1 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........ 57 2 INPUT MENU, Manual setup .......... 57 2ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 40 2ch Stereo, Sound field program ......... 40 3 OPTION MENU ............................... 67 3 OPTION MENU, Manual setup ....... 58 7ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 40 7ch Stereo, Sound field program ......... 40 96/24 indicator ..................................... 24 ■ A A)DISPLAY SET, Option menu ......... 67 A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT, Input menu ....................................... 65 A)SPEAKER SET, Sound menu ......... 59 A.DELAY, Audio settings ................... 63 AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) .......... 22 AFFAIRS, Radio Data System program type .................................... 49 AM antenna connection ....................... 21 AM tuning ............................................ 45 Amplifier function OSD display time, Display settings ............................... 68 Audio components, Connection ........... 19 Audio delay, Audio settings ................. 63 Audio information ................................ 38 Audio input jacks selection .................. 36 AUDIO jacks ....................................... 13 Audio jacks .......................................... 13 AUDIO SELECT ................................. 36 Audio select, Option menu .................. 68 Audio settings, Sound menu ................ 63 Audio signal flow ................................. 15 AUTO SETUP ..................................... 26 AUTO SETUP, Error message ............ 82 Automatic preset tuning, FM/AM tuning ................................. 46 Automatic tuning, FM/AM tuning ....... 45 ■ B B)INPUT RENAME, Input menu ....... 66 B)MEMORY GUARD, Option menu .................................... 68 B)SPEAKER LEVEL, Sound menu ....... 61 Background Video, Multi channel input setup ................ 67 BGV, Multi channel input setup .......... 67 BI-AMP, Advanced setup .................... 77 Bi-Amplifier, Advanced setup ............. 77 Bluetooth setting, Option menu ........... 69 ■ C C)AUDIO SELECT, Option menu ...... 68 C)SP DISTANCE, Sound menu .......... 62 C)VOLUME TRIM, Input menu ......... 66 CD player, Connection ........................ 19 CD recorder, Connection ..................... 19 CENTER SP, Speaker settings ............ 59 92 En Center speaker equalizer, Sound menu .....................................62 Center speaker, Speaker settings ..........59 Center width, Sound field parameter ......42 CINEMA DSP indicator ......................25 CLASSICS, Radio Data System program type ....................................49 Clock time, Radio Data System information .......................................48 COAXIAL IN (1), Input assignment ......65 COAXIAL INPUT assignment, Input assignment ..............................65 COAXIAL INPUT jacks ......................65 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..............13 Connect error, iPod controlling status message ............................................85 Connect MIC!, Auto setup error message .................82 Connecting to the FRONT A terminals .........................12 Connection, AM antenna connection ......21 Connection, Audio components ...........19 Connection, CD player .........................19 Connection, CD recorder .....................19 Connection, DVD player ......................17 Connection, DVD recorder ..................18 Connection, external decoder ...............19 Connection, FM antenna ......................21 Connection, HDMI ...............................14 Connection, MD recorder ....................19 Connection, Multi-format player .........19 Connection, Power cable ......................22 Connection, PVR .................................18 Connection, set-top boxes ....................18 Connection, VCR .................................18 Connection, Video components ...........16 Connection, Yamaha iPod universal dock ...........20 Controlling a TV ..................................71 Controlling other components, Remote control .................................72 Controlling this unit, Remote control .................................71 Creating original SCENE templates ....33 CROSSOVER, Speaker settings ..........61 Crossover, Speaker settings .................61 CT indicator .........................................25 CT WIDTH, Sound field parameter .....42 CT, Radio Data System information .......48 CULTURE, Radio Data System program type ....................................49 Current status display ...........................37 ■ D D)CENTER GEQ, Sound menu ...........62 D)DECODER MODE, Input menu .....66 D)PARAM. INI, Option menu .............69 Decoder indicators ...............................24 Decoder mode, Input menu ..................66 Decoder select mode, Decoder mode ................................. 66 DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks ...... 13 DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks .... 13 DIMENSION, Sound field parameter .... 42 Dimension, Sound field parameter ...... 42 DIMMER, Display settings ................. 67 Dimmer, Display settings .................... 67 DIRECT ............................................... 43 Disconnected, iPod controlling status message ........................................... 85 Display settings, Option menu ............ 67 DIST .................................................... 28 DIST, Auto setup result ....................... 28 DISTANCE ......................................... 27 DISTANCE, Auto setup ...................... 27 DOCK indicator .................................. 24 DRAMA, Radio Data System program type ................................... 49 DSP LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..... 42 DSP level, Sound field parameter ....... 42 DTS decoder prioritize setting, Decoder mode ................................. 66 DVD player connection ....................... 17 DVD recorder connection ................... 18 Dynamic range, Sound menu .............. 63 ■ E E)BLUETOOTH SET, Option menu .................................... 69 E)EXTD SUR., Sound menu ............... 64 E)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu .............. 62 E)MULTI CH SET, Input menu .......... 67 E-1:NO FRONT SP, Auto setup error message ................ 82 E-2:NO SURR.SP, Auto setup error message ................ 82 E-3:SBR->SBL, Auto setup error message ................ 82 E-4:NOISY, Auto setup error message ................ 82 E-5:CHECK SUR., Auto setup error message ........................................... 82 E-6:NO MIC, Auto setup error message ................ 82 E-7:NO SIGNAL, Auto setup error message ................ 82 E-8:USER CANCEL, Auto setup error message ................ 82 E-9:INTERNAL ERROR, Auto setup error message ................ 82 EDUCATE, Radio Data System program type ................................... 49 Effect level, Sound field parameter ..... 42 Enhanced other networks data service, Radio Data System tuning ............... 50 ENHANCER indicator ........................ 24 EON data service, Radio Data System tuning ............... 50 EON indicator ...................................... 25 Index Exchange, Preset station, FM/AM tuning ................................. 47 Extended surround, Sound menu ......... 64 External decoder connection ................ 19 iPod connected, iPod controlling status message .......85 iPod control, Status message ................85 iPod using .............................................53 ■ ■ F F)DYNAMIC RANGE, Sound menu ..................................... 63 Factory presets, Advanced setup ......... 77 FL SCROLL, Display settings ............. 68 FM antenna .......................................... 21 FM antenna connection ........................ 21 FM tuning ............................................ 45 FRONT B speaker setting, Speaker settings ............................... 59 FRONT B, Speaker settings ................. 59 Front input, Multi-channel input setup ................ 67 Front panel display ............................... 24 Front panel display scroll, Display settings ................................ 68 FRONT SP, Speaker settings ............... 59 Front speakers, Speaker settings .......... 59 FRONT, Multi-channel input setup ..... 67 ■ G G)AUDIO SET, Sound menu .............. 63 Games, Sound field program ............... 40 ■ H ■ I L LFE/BASS OUT, Speaker settings ......60 LFE/Bass out, Speaker settings ............60 LIGHT M, Radio Data System program type ....................................49 Loading..., iPod controlling status message ............................................85 Low-frequency effect level, Sound menu .....................................62 LVL ......................................................28 LVL, Auto setup result .........................28 ■ M M.O.R. M, Radio Data System program type ....................................49 Manual preset tuning, FM/AM tuning .................................46 MANUAL SETUP, SET MENU .........57 Manual setup, SET MENU ..................57 Manual tuning, FM/AM tuning ............45 MAX VOL., Audio settings .................63 Maximum volume, Audio settings .......63 MD recorder, Connection .....................19 Memory guard, Option menu ...............68 Menu browse mode, iPod controlling ................................54 Movie Dramatic, Sound field program ........................40 Movie Spacious, Sound field program ........................40 MULTI CH INPUT component selection .........................36 MULTI CH INPUT jacks .....................19 Multi channel input setup, Input menu .......................................67 Multi-channel source with headphones ...............................41 Multi-format player connection ...........19 Multi-information display ....................25 MULTI-ZONE Configuration ..............74 MUTE ..................................................37 MUTE indicator ...................................24 MUTE TYPE, Audio settings ..............63 Muting ..................................................37 ■ N Neo:6 Cinema .......................................41 Neo:6 Music .........................................41 NEWS, Radio Data System program type ....................................49 Night listening mode ............................44 Number of speakers ..............................28 Number of speakers, Auto setup result ..............................28 ■ O ■ P PANORAMA, Sound field parameter ..................... 42 Panorama, Sound field parameter ........ 42 Parameter initialization, Option menu .................................... 69 PCM indicator ..................................... 24 PHONES jack ...................................... 37 Play information display, iPod controlling ............................... 54 Play information display, USB controlling ............................... 52 Playing video sources in the background ............................ 38 PLII Game ........................................... 41 PLII Movie .......................................... 41 PLII Music ........................................... 41 PLIIx Game ......................................... 41 PLIIx Movie ........................................ 41 PLIIx Music ......................................... 41 POP M, Radio Data System program type ................................... 49 Pop/Rock, Sound field program .......... 40 Power cable, Connection ..................... 22 Preset SCENE templates ..................... 32 Preset station exchange, FM/AM tuning ................................ 47 Preset station selection, FM/AM tuning ................................ 47 PRESET, Advanced setup ................... 77 Pro Logic ............................................. 41 Program service, Radio Data System information ...................................... 48 Program type, Radio Data System information ...................................... 48 PS indicator ......................................... 25 PS, Radio Data System information ....... 48 PTY HOLD indicator .......................... 25 PTY indicator ...................................... 25 PTY SEEK mode, Radio Data System tuning ............................................... 49 OPTICAL IN (2) ..................................65 93 En English I) EXTD SUR., Sound menu ............... 64 INFO, Radio Data System program type .................................... 49 Infrared window, Remote control ........ 25 INI.VOL., Audio settings .................... 63 Initial volume, Audio settings .............. 63 Input assignment, Input menu .............. 65 INPUT CH, Multi-channel input setup ................ 67 Input channel and speaker indicators ...... 25 Input channel indicators ....................... 25 Input channels, Multi-channel input setup ................ 67 Input menu, Manual setup ................... 57 Input rename, Input menu .................... 66 Input source indicators ......................... 24 Input source information display ......... 38 ■ ADDITIONAL INFORMATION H) HDMI SET, Sound menu ............... 64 Hall, Sound field program ................... 40 HDMI indicator .................................... 24 HDMI set, Sound menu ....................... 64 HDMI, Connection .............................. 14 HEADPHONE, Dynamic range .......... 63 Headphone, Dynamic range ................. 63 HEADPHONE, Low-frequency effect level .............. 62 Headphone, Low-frequency effect level .............. 62 Headphones .......................................... 37 Headphones indicator .......................... 24 High quality sound ............................... 43 J Jazz, Sound field program ....................40 OPTICAL IN (2), Input assignment .... 65 OPTICAL IN (3), Input assignment .... 65 OPTICAL INPUT assignment, Input assignment ............................. 65 OPTICAL OUT (4), Output assignment ........................... 65 OPTIMIZER MIC jack, Auto setup .... 26 Optimizer microphone ......................... 26 Optimizer microphone, Auto setup ..... 26 Optimizing speaker setting .................. 26 Option menu, Manual setup ................ 58 OSD SHIFT, Display settings ............. 68 OSD shift, Display settings ................. 68 OSD-AMP, Display settings ............... 68 OSD-SOURCE, Display settings ........ 68 Other components controlling by remote control ............................ 72 Other components controlling, Remote control ................................ 72 OTHER M, Radio Data System program type ................................... 49 Index PTY, Radio Data System information ...... 48 PVR connection ................................... 18 ■ R Radio Data System indicator ............... 25 Radio Data System tuning ................... 48 Radio text, Radio Data System information ...................................... 48 Remote control codes ............................iii Remote control, Troubleshooting ........ 87 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ..................... 20 Rename, SCENE template ................... 33 Repeat .................................................. 54 Repeat, iPod controlling ...................... 54 Resetting the system ............................ 87 ROCK M, Radio Data System program type .................................... 49 RT indicator ......................................... 25 RT, Radio Data System information ...... 48 ■ S S VIDEO jacks ..................................... 13 SB L/R SP, Speaker settings ................ 60 SCENE 1 ................................................ 7 SCENE IR code setting, Advanced setup ............................... 77 SCENE IR, Advanced setup ................ 77 SCENE template selection ................... 30 SCIENCE, Radio Data System program type .................................... 49 Selection, Audio input jacks ................ 36 Selection, MULTI CH INPUT component ...... 36 Selection, Preset station, FM/AM tuning ................................. 47 Selection, Radio Data System program type .................................... 49 Selection, SCENE template ................. 30 SET MENU .......................................... 57 Setting remote control codes ................ 73 Setting SCENE template input source, Remote control ................................ 34 Set-top box connection ........................ 18 Shuffle, iPod controlling ...................... 54 SILENT CINEMA ............................... 41 SILENT CINEMA indicator ................ 25 Simple remote mode, iPod controlling ............................... 53 SIZE ..................................................... 27 SIZE, Auto setup .................................. 27 SLEEP indicator .................................. 25 Sleep timer ........................................... 39 Sound field programs with headphones .............................. 41 Sound menu, Manual setup .................. 57 Source feature OSD display time, Display settings ............................... 68 SP ......................................................... 28 SP A B indicators ................................. 24 SP, Auto setup result ............................ 28 Speaker distance ............................ 27, 28 Speaker distance, Auto setup ............... 27 Speaker distance, Auto setup result ..... 28 94 En Speaker distance, Sound menu .............62 Speaker distances, Speaker distance .......62 Speaker level ........................................28 Speaker level adjustment .....................43 Speaker level, Auto setup result ...........28 Speaker level, Sound menu ..................61 Speaker settings, Sound menu .............59 Speaker size ..........................................27 Speaker size, Auto setup ......................27 Speaker wiring .....................................27 Speaker wiring, Auto setup ..................27 Speaker wiring/volume level, Auto setup ........................................27 SPEAKER, Dynamic range .................63 Speaker, Dynamic range ......................63 SPEAKER, Low-frequency effect level ..............62 Speaker, Low-frequency effect level ......62 Specifications .......................................91 SPORT, Radio Data System program type ....................................49 Standby mode, Zone 2 .........................76 STRAIGHT ..........................................41 Straight .................................................41 SUBWOOFER PHASE, Speaker settings ...............................61 Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ......61 SUPPORT AUDIO, HDMI set ............64 Support audio, HDMI set .....................64 SUR. L/R SP, Speaker settings ............60 Surround back left/right speakers, Speaker settings ...............................60 Surround left/right speakers, Speaker settings ...............................60 ■ T Test tone, Center speaker equalizer .....62 TEST, Center speaker equalizer ...........62 Tonal quality adjustment ......................43 Troubleshooting ...................................78 TU, Advanced setup .............................77 Tuner (FM/AM), Troubleshooting .......81 Tuner frequency step, Advanced setup ................................77 Tuner indicators ...................................24 Turning off the power ..........................23 Turning on the power ...........................23 TV Sports, Sound field program ..........40 ■ ■ V VARIED, Radio Data System program type ................................... 49 VCR connection .................................. 18 VIDEO AUX jacks, Front panel ......... 21 Video components, Connection .......... 16 VIDEO CONV., Display settings ........ 67 Video conversion, Display settings ..... 67 Video information ............................... 38 VIDEO jacks ....................................... 13 Video jacks .......................................... 13 Video signal flow ................................ 15 Video sources in the background ........ 38 Virtual CINEMA DSP ......................... 41 VIRTUAL indicator ............................ 25 VOLTAGE SELECTOR ....................... 3 VOLUME level indicator .................... 24 Volume Trim, Input menu ................... 66 ■ W W-1:OUT OF PHASE, Auto setup error message ................ 83 W-2:DISTANCE ERROR, Auto setup error message ................ 83 W-3:LEVEL ERROR, Auto setup error message ................ 83 WIRING/LEVEL ................................ 27 WIRING/LEVEL, Auto setup ............. 27 ■ Y Yamaha iPod universal dock, Connection ...................................... 20 Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer ......................................... 26 YPAO .................................................. 26 YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) ........................ 26 YPAO indicator ................................... 24 ■ Z Zone 2 .................................................. 74 ZONE2 indicator ................................. 24 U Unable to play, iPod controlling status message ............................................85 UNIT, Speaker distance .......................62 Unit, Speaker distance ..........................62 Unknown iPod, iPod controlling status message ............................................85 Unplug HP!, Auto setup error message .................82 USB memory device using, USB portable audio player using .....51 USB playback operation ......................51 USB playback styles ............................70 USB, Troubleshooting .........................84 “MSPEAKER” or “3DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs guarantee service, please contact the dealer from whom it was purchased. If you experience any difficulty, please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our website (http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident). The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha undertakes, subject to the conditions listed below, to have the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamaha’s discretion, without any charge for parts or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and condition, where a model has been discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair. Conditions 1. The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealer’s name) MUST accompany the defective product, along with a statement detailing the fault. In the absence of this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and the product may be returned at the customer’s expense. 2. The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland. 3. The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in writing by Yamaha. 4. The following are excluded from this guarantee: a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear. b. Damage resulting from: (1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party. (2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please note that it is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the product is adequately packaged when returning the product for repair. (3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in accordance with Yamaha’s instructions on the proper use, maintenance and storage, and (b) installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in force in the country where it is used. (4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond Yamaha’s control. (5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third party products. (6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product does not conform to the technical or safety standards of the country of use and/or to the standard specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland. (7) Non AV (Audio Visual) related products. (Products subject to “Yamaha AV Guarantee Statement” are defined in our website at http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident.) 5. Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the guarantee of the country of use shall apply. 6. Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the product. 7. Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration or loss to such settings or data. 8. This guarantee does not affect the consumer’s statutory rights under applicable national laws in force or the consumer’s rights against the dealer arising from their sales/purchase contract. English 95 En ■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Voorpaneel/ Фронтальная панель A BC D E F G H IJ K L VOLUME MAIN ZONE ON/OFF OPTIMIZER MIC SYSTEM OFF ZONE 2 ON/OFF EDIT PRESET/TUNING BAND l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L ZONE CONTROL SCENE 1 l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF PROGRAM TONE CONTROL 3 4 l STRAIGHT INPUT DIRECT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA M i 2 h N O P Q R S T VIDEO L AUDIO USB R ■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/ Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ 1 2 3 POWER POWER TV AV USB STANDBY POWER A B MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK C D AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 G H I TV CH J TV VOL 4 SCENE 5 6 BAND LEVEL TITLE 7 8 3 4 VOLUME MENU L ENTER DISPLAY RETURN MEMORY K M REC 9 0 l EON PROG h MODE - PTY SEEK - START ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 1 2 3 4 STRAIGHT DIRECT NIGHT PARAMETER 5 6 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT N O P Q R APPENDIX A B C D E F FREQ/TEXT ii List of remote control codes Liste des codes de commande Liste der Fernbedienungscodes Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes Список кодов дистанционного управления Blu-ray player Samsung 2137 CD player Yamaha 5000, 5013 CD Recorder Yamaha 5001 DVD Acoustic Solutions 2078 Aiwa 2055, 2100 Akai 2096 Akura 2076 Alba 2078, 2086 Apex 2027, 2049 Awa 2078 Axion 2078 Brainwave 2096 Brandt 2073, 2085 Broksonic 2060 Bush 2075, 2078, 2112 Centrex 2077 Classic 2078 Clatronic 2075 Coby 2078 C-Tech 2074 CyberHome 2025, 2079, 2091 Daewoo 2092, 2098 Dansai 2096 Daytek 2080, 2089 DEC 2075 Denon 2030, 2102, 2103 Denver 2075, 2076 Diamond 2074 DK Digital 2094 Dual 2078 D-Vision 2096 DVX 2074 Elta 2096 Euroline 2096 Funai 2052, 2058 Global Solutions2074 Global Sphere 2074 Goodmans 2075, 2077, 2078 Grundig 2077, 2098 H&B 2075 Haaz 2074 HE 2078 Hitachi 2032, 2072 Home Electronics 2078 Innovation 2072 Irradio 2134 JDB 2078 JVC 2033, 2045, 2053, 2073, 2099 Kenwood 2030, 2097 Kingavon 2075 Koda 2075 Lawson 2074 iii Lenco LG Lifetec Limit LogicLab Luxor Magnavox Magnum MBO Medion Micromaxx Micromedia Microstar Mitsubishi Mizuda Mustek Naiko Onkyo Orava P&B Pacific Panasonic 2075 2084, 2087 2072 2074 2074 2077 2037, 2073, 2075 2072 2078 2072 2072 2073 2072 2035 2075 2078 2077 2073, 2135 2075 2075 2074 2030, 2040, 2054, 2057, 2105, 2110 Philips 2019, 2026, 2046, 2073, 2081, 2090 Pioneer 2036, 2082 Proline 2077 Provision 2075 RCA 2031, 2042, 2050, 2051 Red Star 2076 Reoc 2074 Roadstar 2075, 2078, 2086 Rowa 2077 Saba 2085 Sabaki 2074 Samsung 2032, 2041, 2104, 2113 Sansui 2074 Sanyo 2095 ScanMagic 2078 Scientific Labs 2074 Scott 2088 SEG 2074, 2086 Sharp 2034, 2043, 2059, 2093, 2106 Silva 2076 Singer 2074 Skymaster 2074, 2078 Skyworth 2076 SM Electronic 2074, 2078 Sony 2028, 2029, 2039, 2083, 2107 Soundmaster 2074 Soundmax 2074 Standard 2074 Star Cluster 2074 Starmedia 2075 Supervision 2074, 2078 Sylvania 2052, 2058 Synn 2074 TCM 2072 Teac 2074 Tec Technics Technika Technosonic Tevion Thomson Tokai Toshiba United Voxson Wharfedale Xlogic Yakumo Yamada Yamaha Yukai Zenith 2076 2030 2096 2096 2072, 2074 2085, 2109 2076 2026, 2044, 2048, 2056, 2073, 2108, 2111 2078 2078 2074 2074 2077 2077 2000, 2001, 2003, 2030, 2101 2078 2038, 2047, 2073 DVD Recorder Apex JVC LG Panasonic Philips Pioneer RCA Sony Toshiba Yamaha Yukai 2024 2070 2071 2020, 2065, 2066, 2067 2019, 2061, 2062, 2063 2021 2018 2022, 2064 2068 2023 2069 DVD/LD Pioneer 2036 DVD/VCR JVC LG Panasonic Philips RCA Samsung Sharp Sony Toshiba Zenith 1017, 2045 1071, 2087 1020, 1072, 2040, 2105 1025 1022, 2042 1021, 2041, 2104 1023, 1073, 2043, 2106 1019, 1074, 2039, 2107 1024, 1075, 2044, 2108 1026, 2047 DVD-DVR Panasonic Pioneer Samsung Toshiba 2067 2114 2115 2068 2132 2132 2132 2123, 2128, 2129, 2133 DISH Network 2126, 2127 Dishpro 2126 Echostar 2126, 2127 Expressvu 2126 Gateway 2132 GOI 2126 Hewlett Packard 2132 Hitachi 2008 Howard Computers 2132 HTS 2126 Hughes 2123, 2128 Humax 2123 Hush 2132 iBUYPOWER 2132 JVC 2126, 2127 Linksys 2132 Media Center PC 2132 Microsoft 2132 Mind 2132 Niveus Media 2132 Northgate 2132 Panasonic 2015, 2016, 2017, 2120 Philips 2117, 2121, 2123, 2128 Pioneer 2012, 2013, 2014 Proscan 2129 RCA 2116, 2124, 2129, 2133 ReplayTV 2118, 2119, 2120 Sharp 2009, 2010 Sonic Blue 2119, 2120 Sony 2005, 2006, 2007, 2122, 2130, 2131, 2132 Stack 10 2132 Stack 9 2132 Systemax 2132 Tagar Systems 2132 Tivo 2116, 2121, 2122, 2123, 2130, 2131 Toshiba 2004, 2125, 2132 Touch 2132 UltimateTV 2133 Viewsonic 2132 Voodoo 2132 Yamaha 2011 ZT Group 2132 HD DVD Toshiba 2132 2136 iPod Yamaha DVR ABS Alienware CyberPower Dell DIRECTV 5011 LD player Yamaha 2002 MD Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004 TAPE DECK Yamaha 5005, 5006 TUNER Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009, 5010, 5012, 5014, 5015, 5016, 5017, 5018 TV Acer Acme Acura ADA ADC Admiral Dantax Daytron De Graaf Decca 0217 0060, 0061, 0208 0210 0204, 0207, 0213, 0217 Desmet 0213, 0217 Diamond 0200 Dimensia 0057 Dixi 0208, 0213, 0217 DTS 0208 Dual 0207, 0215, 0216 Dual-Tec 0207, 0208, 0215 Dumont 0060, 0127, 0205, 0207 Durabrand 0126 Dux 0217 Dynatron 0213, 0217 Elbe 0203, 0204, 0212, 0218 Elbe-Sharp 0204 Elcit 0204, 0205 ELECTRO TECH 0208 Electroband 0059 Electrohome 0059, 0060, 0061 Elin 0200, 0207, 0213, 0217 Elite 0209, 0213, 0218 Elman 0215 Elta 0200, 0208 Emerson 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064, 0128, 0205 Envision 0060, 0061 Erres 0213, 0217 ESA 0080 Etron 0208 Euro-Feel 0206 Euroline 0217 Euroman 0200 Euromann 0206, 0207, 0213 Europhon 0200, 0204, 0207, 0213, 0215 Fenner 0208 Ferguson 0212, 0217, 0226 Fidelity 0200, 0207, 0210 Finlandia 0210 Finlux 0204, 0205, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0217 Firstline 0200, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0214 Fisher 0064, 0127, 0128, 0205, 0207, 0215 Flint 0213, 0218 Formenti 0200, 0205, 0207, 0215, 0217 Formenti-Phoenix 0200 Fortress 0205 Frontech 0206, 0208, 0210, 0211, 0214 Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025, 0088, 0127 Funai 0033, 0034, 0035, 0036, 0037, 0062, 0206 Futuretech 0062 Gateway 0094 GBC 0208, 0215, 0218 GE 0057, 0060, 0061, 0122, 0147 GEC 0204, 0207, 0211, 0213, 0217 Geloso 0208, 0210, 0215 General Technic 0208 Genexxa Gibralter GoldHand GoldStar Goodmans GPM Graetz Granada Grandin Grundig Grunpy Halifax Hallmark Hampton Hanseatic Hantarex Harvard HCM Hifivox Higashi Hinari Hisawa Hitachi Hornyphon Hoshai Huanyu Hygashi Hyper Hypson ICE ICeS IMA Imperial Indiana Infinity Ingelen Ingersol Inno Hit Innovation Interbuy Interfunk International Intervision Irradio Isukai ITC ITS 0209, 0211, 0213, 0218 0060 0200 0060, 0061, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0201, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 0171, 0201, 0204, 0206, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0240 0209, 0218 0211 0204, 0207, 0210, 0213, 0217 0208, 0209, 0217 0128, 0130, 0222, 0236, 0255 0062 0200, 0206, 0207 0060, 0061 0200, 0207 0203, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0215, 0217 0204, 0208 0062 0206, 0207, 0208, 0218 0216 0200 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 0209, 0218 0006, 0014, 0015, 0016, 0042, 0060, 0061, 0095, 0105, 0127, 0156, 0179, 0180, 0204, 0207, 0210, 0211, 0215, 0216, 0251 0213 0209, 0218 0200, 0207 0200, 0207 0200, 0207, 0208, 0214, 0215 0206, 0207, 0213, 0217 0127, 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 0200, 0218 0062 0211, 0213, 0214, 0215 0213, 0217 0063 0211 0208 0201, 0204, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 0206, 0208 0208, 0214 0205, 0211, 0213, 0214, 0216, 0217 0200 0206, 0207, 0218 0201, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 0209, 0218 0207, 0215 0200, 0209, 0213, 0218 iv APPENDIX 0093 0207 0208 0255 0206 0058, 0205, 0206, 0210, 0211 Adyson 0200, 0207 Agashi 0200 Agazi 0206 AGB 0204 Aiko 0127, 0200, 0207, 0208 Aiwa 0028, 0139, 0229, 0237 Akai 0059, 0065, 0127, 0129, 0130, 0200, 0204, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218, 0255 Akiba 0209, 0218 Akura 0206, 0209, 0218 Alaron 0200 Alba 0200, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0217, 0218 ALBIRAL 0212 Allstar 0213 Amplivision 0207 Amstrad 0204, 0206, 0208, 0209, 0218 Amtron 0062 Anam 0208 Anam National 0062 Anglo 0208 Anitech 0206, 0208 Ansonic 0203, 0208 AOC 0060, 0061 Apex 0118, 0122, 0132 Arc en Ciel 0216 Arcam 0200 Arcam Delta 0207 Aristona 0213, 0217 ASA 0205, 0211 Asberg 0213 Astra 0208 Asuka 0200, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0218 Atlantic 0200, 0207, 0213, 0217 Atori 0208 Audiosonic 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0216, 0217, 0218 AudioTon 0207 Audiovox 0062 Autovox 0205, 0206, 0207 Awa 0200 Baird 0216 Bang & Olufsen 0205 Basic Line 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 Bastide 0207 Baur 0217 Beko 0228 Belcor 0060 Bell & Howell 0058, 0064 Benq 0081 Beon 0213, 0217 Bestar 0213 Binatone 0207 Black Star 0214 Blaupunkt 0255 Blue Sky 0209, 0218 Bondstec 0214 Boots 0207 Bradford 0062 Brandt 0216, 0226 Brionvega 0205, 0213, 0217 Britannia 0200, 0207 Brockwood 0060 Broksonic 0138 Bruns 0205 BSR 0215 BTC 0209, 0218 Bush 0177, 0208, 0209, 0210, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0218, 0230, 0237 Candle 0060, 0061 Capsonic 0206 Cascade 0208 Cathay 0213, 0217 CCE 0127 Celebrity 0059 Centurion 0213, 0217 Century 0205 CGE 0214, 0215 Cimline 0208, 0218 Citizen 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064 City 0208 Clarivox 0212, 0217 Clatronic 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0214, 0218 CMS 0200 Colortyme 0060, 0061 Concerto 0060, 0061 Concorde 0208 Condor 0200, 0207, 0213 Contec 0200, 0207, 0208 Contec/Cony 0062 Continental Edison 0216 Cosmel 0208 Craig 0062 Crosley 0205, 0214, 0215 Crown 0062, 0063, 0128, 0208, 0213, 0217 CS Electronics 0200, 0207, 0209, 0214, 0218 CTC 0214 Curtis Mathes 0057, 0060, 0061, 0064, 0065 CXC 0062 Cybertron 0209, 0218 Daewoo 0060, 0061, 0120, 0127, 0155, 0193, 0200, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0218, 0238 Dainichi 0200, 0209, 0218 Dansai 0200, 0206, 0213, 0217 ITT ITV JBL JC Penney JCB Jensen JVC 0129, 0208, 0211 0208, 0217 0063 0057, 0060, 0061 0059 0060, 0061 0017, 0018, 0019, 0108, 0136, 0153, 0178, 0190, 0213, 0218 Kaisui 0200, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0218 Kamosonic 0207 Kamp 0200, 0207 Kapsch 0211 Karcher 0207, 0208, 0212, 0217 Kawasho 0059, 0060, 0061, 0200 Kendo 0128, 0210 Kennedy 0215 Kenwood 0060, 0061 Kingsley 0200, 0207 Kloss Novabeam 0062 Kneissel 0203 Kolster 0213 Konka 0209, 0218 Korpel 0213, 0217 Korting 0205 Koyoda 0208 KTV 0062, 0127, 0207 Kyoto 0200, 0212 Lenco 0208 Lenoir 0207, 0208 Lesa 0214 Leyco 0206, 0213, 0217 LG 0016, 0038, 0039, 0127, 0128, 0157, 0158, 0163, 0164, 0166, 0188, 0189, 0200, 0201, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Liesenk 0217 Life 0206, 0208 Lifetec 0206, 0208, 0218 Loewe 0063, 0128, 0203, 0204, 0223, 0227 Loewe Opta 0205, 0213, 0217 Logik 0058 Luma 0210, 0217 Lumatron 0210, 0213, 0217 Lux May 0213 Luxman 0060, 0061 Luxor 0201, 0207, 0210 LXI 0057, 0061, 0063, 0064 Magnadyne 0204, 0205, 0214, 0215, 0217 Magnafon 0200, 0204, 0207 Magnavox 0060, 0061, 0063, 0102, 0103, 0150 Magnum 0206, 0208 Majestic 0058 Mandor 0206 Manesth 0206, 0207, 0213, 0217 Marantz 0060, 0061, 0063, 0090, 0213, 0217 Marelli 0205 Mark 0200, 0213, 0217 Matsui 0204, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0217 Mediator 0213, 0217 v Medion Megatron Melectronic 0206, 0208 0061 0200, 0207, 0208, 0211, 0213, 0216, 0217 Memorex 0058, 0061, 0064, 0208 Memphis 0208 Metz 0205 MGA 0060, 0061 Micromaxx 0206, 0208 Microstar 0206, 0208 Minerva 0204 Minoka 0213 Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016, 0048, 0060, 0061, 0104, 0112, 0113, 0125, 0205, 0213 Mivar 0200, 0201, 0202, 0203, 0204, 0207 Montgomery Ward 0058 MTC 0060, 0061, 0128, 0200 Multi System 0217 Multitech 0062, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0214, 0215, 0217 Murphy 0200, 0207 NAD 0061 Naonis 0210 NEC 0026, 0053, 0060, 0061, 0096, 0127 Neckermann 0205, 0207, 0210, 0213, 0217, 0255 NEI 0213, 0217 Nesco 0214 NET-TV 0082, 0101 New Tech 0208, 0213 New World 0209, 0218 Nicamagic 0200, 0207 Nikkai 0200, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Nikko 0061 Nobliko 0200, 0207 Nogamatic 0216 Nokia 0129, 0211 Nordmende 0205, 0211, 0213, 0216 Nordvision 0217 Oceanic 0211 Olevia 0084 ONCEAS 0207 Onwa 0062, 0218 Orbit 0213 Orion 0126, 0204, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0235 Orline 0218 Orsowe 0204 Osaki 0127, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0218 Osio 0201 Oso 0209, 0218 Osume 0218 Otto Versand 0204, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0255 Pael 0200, 0207 Palladium 0207 Panama 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208 Panasonic 0006, 0007, 0063, 0073, 0074, 0097, 0110, 0114, 0137, 0141, 0151, 0162, 0165, 0186, 0204, 0211, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254 Pathe Cinema 0200, 0203, 0207, 0212, 0215 Pathe Marconi 0212, 0216 Pausa 0208 Perdio 0200 Philco 0060, 0061, 0063, 0128, 0205, 0214, 0215 Philharmonic 0207 Philips 0040, 0060, 0063, 0072, 0115, 0116, 0124, 0130, 0150, 0175, 0184, 0187, 0205, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0217, 0220, 0221, 0232, 0233, 0252, 0253 Philips Magnavox 0124 Phoenix 0200, 0205, 0213, 0217 Phonola 0200, 0205, 0213, 0217 Pilot 0060 Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0060, 0061, 0098, 0109, 0117, 0128, 0181, 0182, 0194, 0195, 0211, 0213, 0216, 0217, 0250 Plantron 0206, 0213 Polaroid 0075 Poppy 0208 Portland 0060, 0061 Prandoni-Prince 0204, 0210 Precision 0207 Prima 0208, 0211 Profex 0208 Profi-Tronic 0213 Proline 0213 Proscan 0057 Prosonic 0200, 0207, 0217 Protech 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Proton 0060, 0061 Provision 0217 Pulsar 0060 Pye 0213, 0217 Pymi 0208 Quasar 0152, 0214 Quelle 0201, 0206, 0207, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Radialva 0218 Radio Shack 0064 Radio Shack/Realistic 0057, 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064 Radiola 0213, 0217 Radiomarelli 0204, 0205, 0214 Radiotone 0213 RCA 0057, 0060, 0061, 0091, 0133, 0135, 0147, 0149 Realistic 0064 Revox 0213, 0217 Rex 0206, 0210, 0211 RFT Rhapsody R-Line Roadstar 0203, 0205 0200 0213, 0217 0206, 0208, 0209, 0218, 0237 Robotron 0205 Rowa 0200 RTF 0205 Saba 0204, 0205, 0211, 0216 saccs 0212 Saisho 0204, 0206, 0207, 0208 Salora 0201, 0204, 0210, 0211, 0215 Sambers 0204 Sampo 0060, 0061, 0083, 0101 Samsung 0029, 0030, 0031, 0032, 0044, 0045, 0046, 0047, 0060, 0061, 0065, 0068, 0069, 0071, 0079, 0087, 0127, 0128, 0130, 0144, 0160, 0161, 0170, 0176, 0183, 0185, 0200, 0201, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0239, 0241, 0242, 0243 Sandra 0200, 0207 Sansui 0123, 0126, 0213 Sanyo 0020, 0021, 0022, 0049, 0060, 0064, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0203, 0207, 0215 SBR 0217 SCHAUB LORENTZ 0211 Schneider 0207, 0209, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0218 Scotch 0061 Scott 0060, 0061, 0062 Sears 0057, 0060, 0061, 0064 SEG 0200, 0206, 0207, 0214, 0215, 0217 SEI 0204 SEI-Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0211 Seleco 0210, 0211, 0215 Sencora 0208 Sentra 0218 Serino 0200 Sharp 0009, 0010, 0011, 0060, 0061, 0066, 0070, 0087, 0111, 0143, 0145, 0167, 0168, 0169, 0198, 0204, 0224, 0247, 0248, 0249 Shogun 0060 Siarem 0204, 0205, 0215 Sicatel 0212 Siemens 0255 Sierra 0213 Signature 0058 Silva 0200 Singer 0205, 0214, 0215 Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0215, 0217 Skantic 0211 Solavox 0211 Sonoko Uher Ultravox 0211, 0213 0200, 0205, 0207, 0214, 0215 United 0217 Universum 0127, 0128, 0129, 0201, 0206, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Univox 0212 Vestel 0210, 0211, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Vexa 0208, 0217 Victor 0213 VIDEOLOGIC 0200 Videologique 0200, 0207, 0209, 0218 Videosat 0214 VideoSystem 0213 Videotechnic 0200 Vidtech 0060, 0061 Viewsonic 0076, 0077, 0092, 0099, 0172, 0173 Visiola 0200, 0207 Vision 0213 Vortec 0213, 0217 Voxson 0205, 0210, 0211, 0213 Waltham 0207, 0212 Wards 0057, 0058, 0060, 0061, 0063 Watson 0213, 0217, 0218 Watt Radio 0200, 0207, 0212, 0215 Wega 0205 Weltblick 0213, 0217 Weston 0215 White Westinghouse 0200, 0207, 0217 Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0004, 0005, 0060, 0061 Yamishi 0218 Yoko 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Yorx 0209, 0218 Zanussi 0210 Zenith 0058, 0060, 0100, 0105, 0119, 0121, 0154 TV/DVD Aiwa Apex Broksonic Bush JVC Panasonic RCA Sylvania Thomson Toshiba 0139, 2055 0132, 2049 0138, 2060 0230, 2112 0136, 2053 0137, 0254, 2054, 2110 0133, 0135, 2050, 2051 0134, 2052 0226, 2109 0131, 0231, 2048, 2111 TV/DVD/VCR Panasonic Samsung Sharp Sylvania Toshiba 0141, 1040, 2057 0241, 1070, 2113 0143, 1028, 2059 0142, 1041, 2058 0140, 1029, 2056 TV/VCR Aiwa Bush 0237, 1066 0237, 1066 Daewoo GE Goodmans Grundig Hitachi JVC Magnavox Orion Panasonic Philips Quasar RCA Roadstar Samsung Sharp Sony Sylvania Tatung Toshiba Zenith 0155, 0238, 1038, 1067 0147, 1030 0240, 1069 0236, 1062 0156, 1039 0153, 1036 0150, 1033 0235, 1065 0151, 1034 0150, 0232, 0233, 1033, 1062, 1063 0152, 1035 0149, 1032 0237, 1066 0144, 0239, 1027, 1068 0145, 1028 0234, 1064 0148, 1031 0237, 1066 0146, 0237, 1029, 1066 0154, 1037 VCR Admiral Adventura Aiwa 1008, 1013 1005 1005, 1042, 1043, 1044, 1066 Akai 1007, 1043 Akiba 1050 Akura 1043, 1050 Alba 1044, 1050 American High 1004 Amstrad 1042 Anitech 1050 ASA 1045, 1046 Asha 1002, 1014 Asuka 1042, 1045, 1046, 1050 Audio Dynamics1000 Audiovox 1003 Baird 1042, 1043, 1047 Basic Line 1044, 1050 Baur 1046 Beaumark 1002, 1014 Bell & Howell 1001 Blaupunkt 1046, 1048 Broksonic 1012, 1013 Bush 1044, 1050, 1066 Calix 1003 Candle 1002, 1003 Canon 1004 CCE 1006 CGE 1042, 1043 Cimline 1044, 1050 Citizen 1002, 1003 Colortyme 1000 Colt 1006 Craig 1002, 1003, 1006, 1014 Crown 1050 Curtis Mathes 1000, 1002, 1004, 1009 Cybernex 1002, 1014 Daewoo 1005, 1038, 1061, 1067 Dansai 1050 Dantax 1044 DBX 1000 De Graaf 1046, 1049 Decca 1042, 1043, 1046 Denon 1010 Dimensia 1009 Dual Dumont 1043, 1046 1042, 1046, 1047, 1049 Dynatech 1005 Electrohome 1003 Electrophonic 1003 Elta 1050 Emerson 1003, 1004, 1005, 1012, 1013 Etzuko 1050 Ferguson 1043 Fidelity 1042 Finlandia 1046, 1047, 1049 Finlux 1042, 1043, 1046, 1047, 1049 FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049, 1050 Fisher 1001, 1047 Flint 1044 Formenti/Phoenix 1046 Fuji 1004 Fujitsu 1042 Funai 1005, 1042 Galaxy 1042 Garrard 1005 GBC 1050 GE 1002, 1004, 1009, 1014, 1030 GEC 1046 Geloso 1050 General Technic 1044, 1048 Go Video 1014 GoldHand 1050 Goldstar 1000, 1003, 1042, 1045 Goodmans 1042, 1045, 1050, 1069 Gradiente 1005 Graetz 1043, 1047 Granada 1046, 1047, 1049 Grandin 1042, 1045, 1050 Grundig 1046, 1050, 1062 Hanseatic 1045, 1046 Harley Davidson1005 Harman/Kardon 1000 Harwood 1006 HCM 1050 Headquarter 1001 Hinari 1044, 1050 Hisawa 1044 Hitachi 1007, 1010, 1039, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1049 Hughes Network Systems 1010 Hypson 1044, 1050 Imperial 1042 Inno Hit 1046, 1050 Innovation 1044, 1048 Instant Replay 1004 Interbuy 1045 Interfunk 1046, 1047 Intervision 1042 Irradio 1045, 1050 ITT 1043, 1047 ITV 1045 JC Penney 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1006 JCL 1004 Jensen 1007 JVC 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1017, 1036, 1043 Kaisui 1050 vi APPENDIX 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0217 Sonolor 0211 Sontec 0213, 0217 Sony 0041, 0059, 0067, 0085, 0086, 0174, 0196, 0199, 0208, 0219, 0234 Sound & Vision 0209, 0218 Soundesign 0060, 0061, 0062 Soundwave 0213, 0217 SSS 0060, 0062 Standard 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 Starlight 0217 Starlite 0062 Stenway 0218 Stern 0210, 0211 Sunkai 0208, 0218 Sunwood 0208, 0213 Superla 0200, 0204, 0207 SuperTech 0200 Supra 0208 Supreme 0059 Susumu 0209 Sutron 0208 Sydney 0200, 0207 Sylvania 0060, 0061, 0063, 0080, 0134, 0142, 0148 Symphonic 0062, 0080 Sysline 0217 Sytong 0200 Tandy 0127, 0207, 0209, 0211, 0218 Tashiko 0200, 0207, 0210 Tatung 0127, 0204, 0207, 0213, 0217, 0237 TCM 0206, 0208 Teac 0127 Tec 0207, 0208, 0214, 0215 Techwood 0060, 0061 Teknika 0058, 0060, 0061, 0062 Teleavia 0216 Telecor 0218 Telefunken 0065, 0213, 0216 Telegazi 0218 Teletech 0208, 0214, 0217 Teleton 0207 Televideon 0200 Tensai 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 Tesmet 0213 Tevion 0206, 0208 Texet 0200, 0207 Thomson 0191, 0192, 0207, 0213, 0216, 0226 Thorn 0212, 0217 TMK 0060, 0061 Tokai 0213 Tokyo 0200, 0207 Toshiba 0027, 0043, 0053, 0054, 0064, 0078, 0089, 0090, 0106, 0107, 0127, 0131, 0140, 0146, 0159, 0197, 0225, 0231, 0237 Towada 0211, 0215 Transtec 0200 Trident 0204 Tristar 0218 Triumph 0204 RX-V563_G-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, January 16, 2008 8:57 AM G Karcher Kendo Kenwood National NEC 1048 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043, 1051 Neckermann 1043, 1046 NEI 1046 Nesco 1050 Nikko 1003 Noblex 1002, 1014 Nokia 1043, 1047 Nordmende 1043 Oceanic 1042, 1043 Okano 1044 Olympus 1004 Optimus 1003, 1008 Orion 1012, 1013, 1044, 1065 Orson 1042 Osaki 1042, 1045, 1050 Otto Versand 1046 Palladium 1043, 1045, 1050 Panasonic 1004, 1020, 1034, 1040, 1048, 1054, 1072 Pathe Marconi 1043 Penney 1010, 1014 Pentax 1010, 1049 Perdio 1042 Philco 1004, 1051 Philips 1004, 1025, 1033, 1046, 1056, 1057, 1059, 1062, 1063 Philips Magnavox 1018 Phonola 1046 Pilot 1003 Pioneer 1011, 1046 Prinz 1042 Profex 1050 Profitronic 1014 Proline 1042 Proscan 1009 Prosonic 1044 Protec 1006 Pye 1046, 1056 Quarter 1001 Quartz 1001, 1047 Quasar 1004, 1035 Quelle 1042, 1046, 1047 Radio Shack 1003 Radio Shack/Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 Radiola 1046 Radix 1003 Randex 1003 RCA 1002, 1004, 1009, 1010, 1014, 1015, 1022, 1032 Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 Rex 1043 RFT 1046 Roadstar 1045, 1050, 1066 Saba 1043 Saisho 1044, 1050 Salora 1047 Samsung 1002, 1014, 1021, 1027, 1052, 1068, 1070 Sanky 1008 Sansui 1007, 1011, 1013, 1043 Sanyo 1001, 1002, 1014, 1047 SBR 1046 Schaub Lorenz 1042, 1043, 1047 Schneider 1042, 1044, 1045, 1046, 1050 Scott 1012 Sears 1001, 1003, 1004, 1010 SEG 1050 SEI-Sinudyne 1046 Seleco 1043 Sentron 1050 Sharp 1008, 1023, 1028, 1053, 1073 Shintom 1006, 1047, 1050 Shivaki 1045 Shogun 1002, 1014 Siemens 1045, 1047 Signature 2000 1008 Silva 1045 Singer 1004, 1006 Sinudyne 1046 Sontec 1045 Sony 1016, 1019, 1055, 1060, 1064, 1074 STS 1004, 1010 Sunkai 1044 © 2008 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. LEVEL 1, 99 QUEENSBRIDGE STREET, SOUTHBANK, VIC 3006, AUSTRALIA Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Sunstar Suntronic Sunwood Sylvania 1042 1042 1050 1004, 1005, 1031, 1041 Symphonic 1005 Taisho 1044 Tandy 1001 Tashiko 1003, 1042 Tatung 1007, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1066 TCM 1044, 1048 Teac 1005, 1007 Technics 1004, 1048 Teknika 1003, 1004, 1005 Teleavia 1043 Telefunken 1043 Tenosal 1050 Tensai 1042, 1045, 1050 Tevion 1044, 1048 Thomson 1043, 1058 Thorn 1043, 1047 TMK 1002, 1014 Tokai 1045, 1050 Tonsai 1050 Toshiba 1013, 1024, 1029, 1043, 1046, 1066, 1075 Totevision 1002, 1003, 1014 Towada 1050 Towika 1050 Uher 1045 Unitech 1002, 1014 Universum 1042, 1045, 1046 Vector Research 1000 Video Concepts 1000 Videon 1044, 1048 Videosonic 1002, 1014 Wards 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1014 Weltblick 1045 White Westinghouse 1013 XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006 Yamaha 1000, 1001, 1007 Yamishi 1050 Yokan 1050 Yoko 1045, 1050 Zenith 1013, 1026, 1037 All rights reserved. Printed in China WN25560 RX-V563 1046 1044 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043 KLH 1006 Kodak 1003, 1004 Korpel 1050 Leyco 1050 LG 1003, 1042, 1045, 1071 Lifetec 1044, 1048 Lloyd's 1005 Loewe 1048 Loewe Opta 1045, 1046 Logik 1006, 1050 Luxor 1047 LXI 1003 M Electronic 1042 Magnasonic 1047 Magnavox 1004, 1018, 1033 Magnin 1003, 1014 Manesth 1050 Marantz 1000, 1001, 1004, 1046, 1051 Marta 1003 Matsui 1044, 1045 Matsushita 1004 Mediator 1046 Medion 1044, 1048 MEI 1004 Memorex 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008, 1013, 1014, 1042, 1045, 1047 Memphis 1050 Metz 1048 MGA 1014 MGN Technology 1002, 1014 Micromaxx 1044, 1048 Microstar 1044, 1048 Migros 1042 Minolta 1010 Mitsubishi 1011, 1042, 1046 Montgomery Ward 1008 Motorola 1004, 1008 MTC 1002, 1014 Multitech 1002, 1005, 1006, 1042, 1046, 1050 Murphy 1042 RX-V563 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ 00_Sheet_RX-V563_EX.book Page 1 Monday, January 7, 2008 5:30 PM RTKAGLEF RX-V563 The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual. Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi. Die umkreisten Zahlen und Buchstaben entsprechen denen in der Bedienungsanleitung. Inringade nummer och bokstäver motsvarar de som anges i bruksanvisningen. I manuali e le lettere dell’alfabeto corrispondono a quelli nel Manuale di istruzioni. Los números y las letras en el interior de círculos se corresponden con aquellos del manual de instrucciones. De omcirkelde cijfers en letters corresponderen met die in de Gebruiksaanwijzing. Цифры и буквы в кружках относятся к цифрам и буквам в Инструкции по эксплуатации. 带圆圈的数字和文字与说明书中的同类数字和文字相对应。 원 번호 및 원 알파벳은 사용 설명서 안의 표기와 일치합니다 . ■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Pannello anteriore/Panel delantero/Voorpaneel/ Фронтальная панель/ 前部面板 / 전변 패널 A BC D E F G H I J K L VOLUME MAIN ZONE ON/OFF OPTIMIZER MIC SYSTEM OFF ZONE 2 ON/OFF EDIT PRESET/TUNING BAND l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L ZONE CONTROL SCENE 1 l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF PROGRAM TONE CONTROL 3 STRAIGHT DIRECT h 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h VIDEO AUDIO SELECT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA M Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 2 N O P Q R S T L AUDIO USB R 00_Sheet_RX-V563_EX.book Page i Monday, January 7, 2008 5:30 PM ■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/ Telecomando/Mando a distancia/Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ/ 遥控器 / 리모콘 1 2 3 POWER POWER TV AV USB STANDBY POWER A B MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK C D AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 G H I TV CH J TV VOL 4 SCENE 5 6 BAND LEVEL TITLE 7 8 3 4 VOLUME MENU L ENTER DISPLAY RETURN MEMORY K M REC 9 0 A B C D E F FREQ/TEXT l EON PROG h MODE - PTY SEEK - START ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 1 2 3 4 STRAIGHT DIRECT NIGHT PARAMETER 5 6 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT N O P Q R Printed in China Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI WN26140-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX-V563 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX-V563 Manuale del proprietario
- français: Yamaha RX-V563 Le manuel du propriétaire
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V563 Bedienungsanleitung
- dansk: Yamaha RX-V563 Brugervejledning
- svenska: Yamaha RX-V563 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V563 El kitabı
- română: Yamaha RX-V563 Manualul proprietarului